Page 1 FP85-104 S1E Operations and Maintenance Manual NWA-041693-001 ISSUE 2.0 Stock # 439TBA To view the latest issue of this document go to NEC Knowledgebase @ http://www.kbase.cns.nec.com.au & search for NEC-10789...
Page 2 NEC Corporation. ElectraMail and Electra Elite are registered trademarks of NEC America, inc. PCPro is a trademark of NEC Corporation. UNIVERGE is a trademark of NEC Corporation. This document may include references to other brand and product names that are trademarks or registered trademarks which belong to the respective trademark owner.
Page 3 NEC Infrontia Corporation reserves the right to change the specifica- tions, functions, or features, at any time, without notice. NEC Infrontia Corporation has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC Infrontia Corporation, and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC Infrontia Corporation.
Page 4 Incorrect use of the equipment may limit the system performance or cause the system to fail. The telephone system can only be used in NEC-designated countries. If a system-down, malfunction, defect or external factor such as an electrical failure indirectly causes a loss of profit, the company (or affiliates) will not be held responsible.
Page 5 Do not touch the internal parts of the main power source to disassemble or configure it. This action may cause a fire, an electrical shock or a system failure. NEC Infrontia Corporation does not take any responsibility for disassembled or reconfigured equipment.
Page 6 Be careful when using any peripheral equipment’s Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). If the liquid leaks, it can be harmful to the user and to the system. Before connecting any non-NEC, customer-provided equipment, check with the supplier to ensure that the equipment is compatible. If the supplier cannot confirm the compatibility, do not connect the equipment.
Page 7 PRODUCT LIABILITY WARNING Do not place any object on the system or the main power source. If the object falls, it might cause personal injury or damage to the equipment. When removing a plug from an outlet, be sure to grip the plug, not the cord. Gripping the cord to remove the plug could cause a fire or an electrical shock to occur.
Page 8 PRODUCT LIABILITY WARNING Observe the following precautions when using any optional batteries: • The system’s emergency back-up battery may be a rechargeable lead battery. Check the emergency battery for an electrical failure. • Battery acid (electrolyte) is extremely harmful to human skin and eyes. If battery acid contacts skin, wash the affected area with soap and water.
Page 9 ATTENTION Do not use benzine, thinner or alcohol for cleaning. When removing dust and dirt, put diluted, mild detergent on a cloth and then wring out the cloth. Remove the dust and dirt with the cloth and then wipe the cleaned area with a dry cloth. Thinner Do not place any equipment in the following environments: •...
Page 10 The telephone company may make changes in its technical operations and procedures. When such changes af- fect the compatibility or use of the UNIVERGE SV8500 system, the telephone company is required to give adequate notice of the changes in order for you to maintain uninterrupted service.
Page 11 If equipment malfunctions, all repairs must be performed by an authorized agent of NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. or by NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. The user requiring service is responsible for reporting the need for ser- vice to an NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. authorized agent or to NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
Page 12 Failure to upgrade the premises systems or peripheral equipment to recognize the new codes as they are estab- lished will restrict the customer and the customer’s employees from gaining access to the network and these codes. DIRECT INWARD DIALING ALLOWING THIS EQUIPMENT TO BE OPERATED IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO NOT PROVIDE Note: FOR PROPER ANSWER SUPERVISION IS A VIOLATION OF PART 68 OF THE FCC RULES.
Page 13 This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. 1.10 HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY NEC Multiline Terminals and NEC Single Line Telephones that are provided for this system are hearing aid compatible. The manufacturer of other Single Line Telephones for use with the system must provide notice of hearing aid compatibility to comply with FCC rules that now prohibit the use of non-hearing aid compatible telephones.
Page 14 • CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03 – Safety of Information Technology Equipment – Part l: General Re- quirements • UL 60950-1-SAFETY, 1st Edition – Safety of Information Technology Equipment – Part I: General Re- quirements 4. INDUSTRY CANADA REQUIREMENTS Industry Canada has established rules that permit this telephone system to be directly connected to the tele- phone network.
Page 15 Industrie Canada. 5. BATTERY DISPOSAL The UNIVERGE SV8500 system includes the batteries listed below. When disposing of these batteries, Chas- sis, and/or Blades, you must comply with applicable federal and state regulations regarding proper disposal procedures.
Page 16 For Ni-Cd batteries, you can also call 1-800-8-BATTERY when further information is required. • The packaging for the UNIVERGE SV8500 system contains the following labels regarding proper dispos- PRODUCT PACKAGE LABELING CONTAINS NICKEL-CADMIUM BATTERY. BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED OF PROPERLY.
Page 17 Some products described in this manual are not (yet) available for specific countries or markets. For this rea- son, the related specifications, instructions for installation and use of these specific products are not valid for these markets. Refer to NEC Philips for more details in case of any questions about these products. CE Notice (European Union) The equipment described in this manual is intended to be connected to local area networks (LAN) and supports a wide range of peripheral equipment.
Page 18 If no arrangement has been made with your supplier, please contact the local author- ities for further information. 3. Declaration of Conformity • esky “NEC Philips Unified Solutions” tímto prohlašuje, že tento “SV8500” je ve shod se základními požadavky a dalšími p íslušnými ustanoveními sm rnice 1999/5/ES. http://www.nec-philips.com/doc • Dansk Undertegnede “NEC Philips Unified Solutions”...
Page 19 Directive 1999/5/EC. http://www.nec-philips.com/doc • Español Por medio de la presente “NEC Philips Unified Solutions” declara que el “SV8500” cumple con los req- uisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. http://www.nec-philips.com/doc •...
Page 20 Ar šo “NEC Philips Unified Solutions” deklar , ka “SV8500” atbilst Direkt vas 1999/5/EK b tiskaj m pras b m un citiem ar to saist tajiem noteikumiem. http://www.nec-philips.com/doc • Lietuvi Šiuo “NEC Philips Unified Solutions” deklaruoja, kad šis “SV8500” atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir ki- tas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
Page 21 “NEC Philips Unified Solutions” izjavlja, da je ta “SV8500” v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolo ili direktive 1999/5/ES. http://www.nec-philips.com/doc • Slovensky “NEC Philips Unified Solutions” týmto vyhlasuje, že “SV8500” sp a základné požiadavky a všetky prís- lušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
Page 22: Terms In This Manual
In this manual, the following are used unless the types of the Telephony Server and the PBX need to be identified. TERMS USED IN THIS MANUAL SYSTEM NAMES SV8500, the system UNIVERGE SV8500 SV7000, the system UNIVERGE SV7000 Note 1...
Page 23 Terminal Name In this manual, the following terminals are mentioned as each common term unless these types need to be identified. TERMINAL NAMES GENERIC TERMS USED IN THIS MANUAL Dterm Series E/Dterm 75 Dterm Dterm Series i Digital terminal DT310 DT300 Series DT330 Dterm Series E/Dterm 75...
Page 24 Media Gateway (MG), Media Converter (MC), and Voice Conference Server (VS) Names In this manual, the following are mentioned as each common term unless these types need to be identified. GENERIC TERMS USED IN THIS MANUAL EQUIPMENT NAMES MG(PRI) Card [SCA-24PRIA] MG(PRI) Box [MG-24PRIA] MG(PRI) MG(PRI) Card [SCA-30PRIA]...
Page 25 General Terms • PIR on this manual is a term equivalent to GC (Gateway Chassis) in the North America. • Automatic Number Identification (ANI) on this manual is a term equivalent to Calling Line Identification (CLI) in Australia. TERMS-4...
Page 26: Table Of Contents
5. REPORTING FAULT TO NEC ........
Page 27 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page 1.3 How to Adjust Date and Time ........... 2.
Page 28 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page 9.2 Operating Procedure for PCPro ..........134 10.
Page 29 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page B1-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent) ........B1-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary) .
Page 30 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page System Initialize ........... . . CPU MBR Key Turn ON .
Page 31 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page 16-A Inside Trunk All Busy ..........16-B Virtual Tie Line Set Report .
Page 32 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page 36-I Bandwidth Fault ........... . . 36-J Bandwidth Fault Recovery .
Page 33 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page 2.4 Replacement Procedure of CF Card ..........576 2.5 Replacement Procedure of FANC (PZ-M699) .
Page 34 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page 4.10 Fan Unit Fault ............. . . 650 4.10.1 Check Point .
Page 35 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page AACT Assignment of Activation Code ......... . . 694 ALLC Assignment of Line Load Control .
Page 36 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page DIPI Display IP equipment Information ......... 798 DISD Display of IP Station Data .
Page 37 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page MBCT Make-Busy of Connection Trunk for LDM ........874 MBCTC Make-Busy of Connection Trunk-Continuous for LDM .
Page 38 INTRODUCTION 1. General Knowledge of SV8500 1.1 About Release Information The table below shows the relationship between IPX/SV7000 and SV8500 for the release information. IPX/SV7000 SV8500 R25E – INT-1 –...
Page 39 1.2 Structure of Telephony Server 1.2.1 General This section explains the structure of Telephony Server, mainly about processors it has. Telephony Server has TP and SP as processors on its CPU. Both TP and SP work together to provide various features. The following are general description of TP and SP.
Page 40 1.3 Registration Destination of IP Devices/Stations Here lists IP addresses of Telephony Server to be assigned to each IP device/station as its registration destina- tion. The IP address varies depending on several conditions, consisting of PH kind that handles the device/sta- tion, protocol mode in which the device/terminal operates, and Telephony Server’s configuration.
Page 41 MG(PRI) in Proprietary Protocol mode uses LAN1 as the registration destination while uses LAN2 as the Note 2: signaling control port. LAN interface for the signaling control port, however, can be changed to LAN1 by ADTM command. “SIP terminal” excludes WLAN Handset (MH Series) here. Note 3: When migrating from existing IPX/SV7000 to SV8500, LAN1/LAN2 can be selected as LAN interface for Note 4:...
Page 42 1.4 Lan Interface Accommodation There are four LAN ports on the front panel of Telephony Server, of which LAN1 and LAN2 play a central role in managing the whole system. This section explains usage of them (LAN1/LAN2). Additional information about the LAN ports is described in “Management by 4-LAN Port” of the Installation Manual. 1.4.1 LAN1 Accommodation LAN1 mainly accommodates the devices/terminals for call controlling.
Page 43 Each communication using LAN1 as its interface is listed in the table below, where relationships between each application and socket are shown. Application Protocol Port No. IP Address Registration by Proprietary Protocol 3456 ACT Registration by SIP 5060 ACT/System #0/System #1 Internal PHI 64000 Note 1...
Page 44 1.4.2 LAN2 Accommodation LAN2 mainly accommodates the devices for operation/administration and some for call controlling. They need to keep links with Telephony Server when system changeover is performed in dual configuration system. In each case where the system is in single configuration or dual configuration, IP address (ACT) is basically as- signed to the devices as Telephony Server address.
Page 45 Application Protocol Port No. IP Address PCPro 60000 CCIS Cluster 60001 SMDR 60010 60020 60030 60040 60050 CS Report 60080 60190 FCCS Cluster 60210 DEBUG 1024-65535 SNMP 161/162 SMTP (Client) 1024-65535 SNTP Internal PHI (for MG(PRI)) 64000 Internal PHC (Server) 57000 Internal PHC (Client) 65030...
Page 46 1.5 Trunking Diagram The figure below shows the trunking diagram of SV8500 for overviewing the network configuration. Note 1 Telephony Server Analog TEL Digital terminal ISDN terminal Analog PSTN Tie line MUX/TSW CCIS MODEM ISDN (PRI) ISDN (PRI) ISDN (BRI) Printer ATT/Desk Console PCPro...
Page 47 This table identifies the function name of each line/trunk interface and switching controller. SYMBOL DESCRIPTION Attendant Console Interface Basic Rate Interface Trunk Bothway Trunk Common Channel Handler Conference Trunk Central Office Trunk D-Channel Handler Direct Inward Dialing Direct-In Termination Digital Line Circuit Direct Outward Dialing Digital Interface Electronic Line Circuit...
Page 48: Chapter 1 General
CHAPTER 1 General CHAPTER 1 General 1. ABOUT THIS MANUAL This manual describes routine system maintenance procedures and fault repair procedures. This chapter explains the system configuration as well as how to follow the manual and provides precautions pertaining to maintenance jobs as a whole.
Page 49: General
CHAPTER 1 General CPU Card #1 IOC (Option) CPU Card #0 Front View Power Module EMA SUB-A EMA SUB-B System Cooling FAN Module EXB #1 Power Module EXB #0 Rear View – 2 –...
Page 50: Pir And Tswr
CHAPTER 1 General 2.2 PIR and TSWR Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 show the slot configuration and the condition of mounted circuit card types. Figure 1-1 Slot Accommodation (PIR) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Slot number Type of circuit card 16 16 16 16 16 16...
Page 51: Glossary
CHAPTER 1 General 3. GLOSSARY The following is a list of typical technical terms that are used in this document. • C-Level Infinite Loop • B-Level Infinite Loop • Port Microprocessor (PM) • Ready Error • Parity Error • Monitor Restart (Phase 0) •...
Page 52 CHAPTER 1 General • C-Level Infinite Loop A program repeatedly executes specific routines due to a fault of the main memory, data destruction, etc. The program is not able to process normally. This faulty condition is referred to as Program Infinite Loop.
Page 53 CHAPTER 1 General In this processing, the faulty PM (Line/Trunk Card) is isolated from the system and, at the same time, the calls associated with that faulty PM (Line/Trunk Card) are released. No calls related to the faulty PM (Line/Trunk Card) are processed and the system normally runs without the faulty PM (Line/Trunk Card).
Page 54: How To Read Precautions, Diagnostic, And Fault Repair Information
CHAPTER 1 General 4. HOW TO READ PRECAUTIONS, DIAGNOSTIC, AND FAULT REPAIR INFORMATION 4.1 Precaution about Diagnostic Procedure/Fault Repair Procedure When performing diagnostic procedures/fault repair procedures, always adhere to the following actions: (1) When replacing a circuit card with a spare, handle the circuit card using the Field Service Kit. (a) To protect the circuit card from static electricity, wear a wrist strap before handling the circuit card.
Page 55 CHAPTER 1 General Figure 1-4 How to Hold a Circuit Card When holding a circuit card with bare hands, do not touch the component mounted side of the card or the connector portion. Note Connector (Contact) Portion Set MB switch to UP.
Page 56 CHAPTER 1 General (4) When a circuit card appears faulty, check the following items before replacing it with a spare: (a) Poor connector contact at the circuit card may be responsible for the fault. Repeat insertion and ex- traction of the circuit card a few times. Clean the connector portion, and recheck for proper operation. (b) Check the lead wires of vertically-mounted parts (resistors, capacitors, etc.) to ensure they have not shorted each other or broken.
Page 57 CHAPTER 1 General (b) Using a soft cotton cloth, wipe both sides of the connector portion (gold-plated terminal) clean (only PA-XX type circuit card), as shown in Figure 1-8. Figure 1-8 How to Clean Gold-Plated Terminal gauze Gold-plated terminal Use cloth (gauze, etc.) to clean. Note 1: After wiping, be careful not to leave lint on the surface of the circuit card.
Page 58: How To Follow Diagnostic Procedure/Fault Repair Procedure
CHAPTER 1 General • The following is an example where the fault was recovered after the replacement of circuit cards: START Set the first circuit card back into its mounting slot If the fault recurs: Replace the circuit card. Set the second circuit card back into its mounting slot If the fault recurs: Replace the circuit card.
Page 59 CHAPTER 1 General • Proceed with judgment as to whether the fault status coincides with the indicated status, following the sequence beginning from START. • How to proceed with the diagnosis work is explained in Figure 1-9. STEP 1 Determine whether the fault coincides with the fault status (1) in Figure 1-9. STEP 2 If the fault status does coincide, the fault is indicated by (2).
Page 60 CHAPTER 1 General Figure 1-9 Diagnostic Work Items and Symbols Example START FAULT When : It is the fault of Section No. (Chapter 5) (11) Perform FAULT SUPERVISION When FAULT When : It is the fault of Section No. (Chapter 5) (11) with When...
Page 61 CHAPTER 1 General Figure 1-10 Recovery Procedure Example START Check When Check Check When When – 14 –...
Page 62: Reporting Fault To Nec
General 5. REPORTING FAULT TO NEC When the cause of a fault is uncertain, make note of the situation involved and report it to NEC. When forwarding faulty circuit cards to NEC, exercise caution to protect from static electricity. 5.1 Fault Reporting Method The following three items must be included in the report without fail: (1) Faulty situation (reports should be similar to “dial tone is not heard only on individual lines,”...
Page 63 CHAPTER 1 General (2) Circuit Card Version Number, Program Name, and Program Package Version Number of the circuit card. See Figure 1-11. Figure 1-11 Circuit Card Version Number, Program Name, and Program Package Version Number 16LC Circuit Card Name Circuit Card Version Number Program Name SPA- 16LCBE...
Page 64: Forwarding Faulty Circuit Card Method
General 5.2 Forwarding Faulty Circuit Card Method Send the faulty circuit card to the NEC agent to whom a request is made for a replacement card. Adhere to the following procedure for sending the faulty circuit card: (1) Insert connector covers onto the circuit card terminals.
Page 65: System Maintenance Outline
CHAPTER 1 General 6. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE This chapter explains the outline of fault diagnosis and duties necessary to maintain the system. Figure 1- 12 shows the workflow of the administrative management procedures. Figure 1-12 Flow of Administrative Management Procedures Administrative Management Procedures Administrative Procedures...
Page 66: Basic Knowledge
CHAPTER 1 General 7. BASIC KNOWLEDGE This section identifies the information necessary for the system operations and maintenance procedures. • System Configuration • Line Equipment Numbers (LENS) • Local Partition (LP) Number • Fault Detecting Function • Range of Faults Specification –...
Page 67: System Configuration
CHAPTER 1 General 7.1 System Configuration Figure 1-1 shows the system configuration of the fully expanded 1-IMG and 4-IMG type. For details on each module accommodation, see Figure 1-2 through Figure 1-4. Figure 1-1 System Configuration DC Powered Model: 1-IMG 4-IMG 4-PIR (maximum) IMG 0...
Page 68 CHAPTER 1 General Figure 1-2 Face Layout of 1-IMG System 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 PIR 3 FANU 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 PIR 0 EMA Card CPU Card #1...
Page 69 CHAPTER 1 General Figure 1-3 Face Layout of 4-IMG System (SV8500 Server and TSWR) FANU TSWR EMA Card CPU Card #1 IOC Card (Option) SV8500 Server IOC Card (Option) CPU Card #0 BASEU – 22 –...
Page 70 CHAPTER 1 General Figure 1-4 Face Layout of 4-IMG System (IMG) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 PIR 3 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 PIR 2 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 PIR 1...
Page 71: Line Equipment Numbers (Lens)
CHAPTER 1 General 7.2 Line Equipment Numbers (LENS) The Line Equipment Numbers (LENS) are used to specify the location of a circuit (trunk/port) in any of the PIR universal slots. Refer to the figures in this section, and confirm the LENS format used in the system. As shown in Figure 1-5, the LENs consists of six digits: two digits for Module Group (MG), one digit for Unit (U), two digits for Group (G), and one digit for Level (LV).
Page 72 CHAPTER 1 General Figure 1-7 Unit Number Allocations On each Module Group (MG: 00 - 07), a total of four Units (U0 - U3) can be assigned. 4-IMG IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 PIR3 MG01 MG03 MG05 MG07 PIR2 PIR1 MG00 MG02 MG04 MG06...
Page 73: Group
CHAPTER 1 General 7.2.3 Group The Group (G) numbers are allocated as shown in Figure 1-8. A total of two Groups are assigned on each universal slot within the PIR. Slots 10, 11, 12, 21, 22, 23 can contain a total of four Groups as an exception.
Page 74: Level
CHAPTER 1 General 7.2.4 Level Figure 1-9 explains the Level (LV) numbers. There are a total of eight Levels (LV 0 - LV 7) on every Group number, that ranges from 00 to 31. Figure 1-9 Level Number Allocations A total of eight Levels (LV 0 - LV 7) can be assigned on each Group. 4-IMG 1-IMG IMG0...
Page 75: Local Partition (Lp) Number
CHAPTER 1 General 7.3 Local Partition (LP) Number The Local Partition (LP) number refers to a logical local processor number, theoretically assigned for each IMG that consists of four (or less) Port Interface Racks (PIR). Though the local processor does not actually exist in any of the IMGs, the system can apply the two-digit LP number to each IMG (see Figure 1-10) on its data memory program.
Page 76: Fault Detecting Function
CHAPTER 1 General 7.4 Fault Detecting Function The system finds a fault by its fault detecting circuit and the fault detecting program. Once a fault occurs, the system initiates a remedial action such as system changeover, make-busy setting, or restart processing by the automatic diagnosis function.
Page 77 CHAPTER 1 General Figure 1-12 Block Diagram of Fault Detection (1-IMG) - Symbols - Firmware : Circuit Card in PIR/TSWR faults : Card in SV8500 Server : Faults to be detected LC/TRK : Speech Path Ready : Fault Information flow Clock Howler, Ringer fault...
Page 78 CHAPTER 1 General Figure 1-13 Fault Detection Block Diagram (4-IMG) Firmware faults LC/TRK - Symbols - : Circuit Card in PIR/TSWR TSWR : Card in SV8500 Server : Faults to be detected : Speech Path : Fault Information flow Ready Clock PCPro Ready...
Page 79 CHAPTER 1 General The CPU transfers line/trunk card control information to the associated peripheral circuits via IO Bus. When a party error is detected in the transfer data or when the required information cannot be transferred from a circuit card, the CPU identifies the cause of the fault, changes over the CPU so that system operation is not affected, and executes restart processing.
Page 80: Range Of Faults Specification
CHAPTER 1 General 7.5 Range of Faults Specification (1) Upon receiving a fault report from a station user or an operator, the technician can assume a faulty card exists if the range affected by the fault can be determined. For the detailed procedure, refer to Chapter 6. Use the following actions to check the MDF: (a) Check the LENS of the reporter (Station or ATTCON/DESKCON).
Page 81 CHAPTER 1 General Figure 1-14 General System Block Diagram (1-IMG) PM Bus LC/TRK LC/TRK PIR3 PM Bus LC/TRK LC/TRK PIR2 PM Bus LC/TRK LC/TRK PIR1 PM Bus MUX INT MUX INT EXB INT EXB INT LC/TRK LC/TRK Local I/O BUS Local I/O BUS BUS0 BUS1...
Page 82 CHAPTER 1 General Figure 1-15 Speech Path Block Diagram (1-IMG) PIR 3 LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK PIR 2 LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK PIR 1 LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK PIR 0 LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK [Symbols] : Speech Path : Cable TSW : PH-SW10-A, etc. : Circuit Card (ACT) : Circuit Card (STBY) MUX : PH-PC36...
Page 83 CHAPTER 1 General Figure 1-16 Range of Speech Path Fault (1-IMG) Faults within this range affects these two slots. LC/TRK Faults within this range affects this module. 32ch LC/TRK PIR 3 512ch Fault within this range affects this circuit card. Faults within this range affects these two slots.
Page 84 CHAPTER 1 General Figure 1-17 CPU Controlling Block Diagram (4-IMG) IMG0 IMG1 PIR 3 PIR 3 PM BUS PM BUS LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK PM BUS PM BUS PIR 2 PIR 2 PM BUS PM BUS LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK PM BUS PM BUS PIR 1...
Page 85 CHAPTER 1 General Figure 1-18 Speech Path Block Diagram (4-IMG) (1 of 2) IMG0 IMG1 PIR3 PIR 3 LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK PIR 2 PIR 2 LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK PIR 1 PIR 1 LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK PIR 0...
Page 86 CHAPTER 1 General Figure 1-18 Speech Path Block Diagram (4-IMG) (2 of 2) IMG2 IMG3 PIR 3 PIR 3 LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK PIR 2 PIR2 LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK PIR 1 PIR1 LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK PIR 0...
Page 87 CHAPTER 1 General Figure 1-19 Range of Speech Path Fault (4-IMG) Faults within this range affects these two slots. LC/TRK Faults within this range affects this module. 32ch LC/TRK PIR 3 512ch Fault within this range affects this circuit card. Faults within this range affects these two slots.
Page 88: Chapter 2 Operations Of Sv8500 Server
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server This chapter covers the following topics in this order: • 1. HOW TO SET THE CURRENT DATE AND TIME • 2. ALARM INDICATIONS • 3. INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE OF THE SYSTEM •...
Page 89: How To Set The Current Date And Time
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 1. HOW TO SET THE CURRENT DATE AND TIME 1.1 General System clock can be manually or automatically adjusted as shown below. For automatic adjustment, an SNTP server is required. Figure 2-1 How to Set the Current Date and Time ATIM/ATIMN manual adjustment automatic adjustment...
Page 90: How To Adjust Date And Time
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server For the details, refer to UNIVERGE SV8500 Data Programming Manual - Business. Note: Activation of time-synchronization (SNTP) service is limited to once a day. Thus, if ANTPL command is Note: used to change the start time for SNTP service after SNTP service is already active for that day, the change takes effect from the following day.
Page 91: Alarm Indications
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 2. ALARM INDICATIONS If trouble occurs in the system, the system activates an appropriate remedial action such as system changeover, make-busy of the circuit card, restart processing by executing the automatic diagnostic function. Results of the action taken and the faulty situation are displayed by the alarm indication and system message (s).
Page 92: Alarm Indications
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 2.3 Alarm Indications The system has alarm lamps on EMA card as shown below. The table below lists the meaning of each lamp. Alarm Indications on EMA card SYS ALM lamp ALM lamp (SYS1: used for CPU #1) LINK ACT PBI No.
Page 93: Variable Alarm Indication
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 2.4 Variable Alarm Indication This allows users to make a flexible change of system message output grades that range 0 to 3 and alarm lamp grades that consist of MJ, MN, SUP and NONE. The maintenance personnel can give a proper alarm grade to each system message according to their requirements.
Page 94: Initialization Procedure Of The System
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 3. INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE OF THE SYSTEM 3.1 General This section explains how to initialize the system. The following can be used: • PCPro (SINZ) • PCPro Tools (System Control - System Reboot) • By INIT key Operation on EMA card •...
Page 95: Initialization By Pcpro (Sinz)
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server The relationship of operation types and Initialization types is as follows. Relationship between Initialization Types and Available Operations X: Available -: Not Available Available Operations Initialization Type PCPro PCPro INIT key Operation Tuning Off/On (SINZ) Tools (EMA card)
Page 96 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server For the detail, refer to SINZ on page 906 in this manual. Note: STEP 3 Make sure that the SYS ALM lamp (red) lights on the EMA card. STEP 4 Log into the system again from the PCPro. STEP 5 Set the current date and time from the PCPro.
Page 97: Initialization By Pcpro Tools
Select “System Reboot” from the list box, and then click “Execute” button. • Initialization starts. • PCPro is automatically placed in logout state. For the detail, refer to “UNIVERGE SV8500 Command Manual“. Note: STEP 4 Make sure that the following lamps light green on the EMA card. Lamp name...
Page 98: Initialization By Init Key Operation (Ema Card)
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 3.4 Initialization by INIT key Operation (EMA card) The following initialization type is available. • Non Load Initial All on-going calls will be disconnected. The system will be rebooted by using program and office data that are in the MEM.
Page 99: Initialization By Turning Off And On The System
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 3.5 Initialization by Turning OFF and ON the System This section explains how to start up the system that has been shut down for some reason. If the system cannot be initialized by the SINZ/PCPro Tools/INIT key, shut down the system and restart the system by this procedure.
Page 100: Routine Diagnosis
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 4. ROUTINE DIAGNOSIS For confirming its own servicing status, the system automatically executes self diagnosis every day, and displays the result of the diagnosis as a system message. By this function, possible causes for trouble can be discovered in an early stage and possible trouble can be prevented from remaining undetected.
Page 101 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server • SYS1, INDEX 89, 90 — Routine Diagnosis Items: The item corresponding to each bit is to execute once a day. • Single System Configuration INDEX89 b1 — DM Check (DM = Data Memory) 0/1 = No/Yes b4 —...
Page 102: Routine Diagnosis Result
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Routine Diagnosis Result The result of routine diagnosis displays as a system message. Normally ended: Abnormality detected Refer to Chapter 3 for more details. In case an abnormality is detected, initiate necessary processing explained in Chapter 5. –...
Page 103: Office Data Maintenance
SV8500 server. Also, office data stored in the CF card can be copied and stored in other storage devices such as hard disk by using PCPro Tools. Figure 2-3 PCPro Tools and PCPro Coverage UNIVERGE SV8500 Server Office Data, etc. CF card...
Page 104: Office Data Backup
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 5.3 Office Data Backup The office data of the SV8500 can be backed up in the CF card (s) or other storage de- vices such as the hard disk of a PC. Use the following for each type of backup: ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive...
Page 105: Pcpro Tools
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 5.3.2 PCPro Tools The office data stored in the CF card of SV8500 can be saved (downloaded) in other storage device by using PCPro Tools. Also, office data stored in other storage device can be loaded (uploaded) by using this tool.
Page 106 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server <How to Download the Office Data> STEP 1 Run PCPro Tools. STEP 2 Select “Office Data” in frame labeled “Operation” on the initial screen. STEP 3 Select an appropriate connection account from “Connect Account Name” list box. STEP 4 Specify an appropriate CF card drive name and the system of CPU by using “Drive”...
Page 107 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server <How to Upload the Office Data> To upload office data to the CF card of SV8500 server, you have to import the office data to upload in ad- vance, so that PCPro Tools can control the data. And then, upload the data to the CF card of a specified SV8500 server.
Page 108: Explanations On Each Item
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 5.3.3 Explanations on Each Item • Call Forwarding Data and One-Touch Speed Calling Data The data for Call Forwarding and Speed Calling features can be saved. You can check whether the backup has been executed properly by checking the Auto Verify Afterward checkbox on MEM_HDD command.
Page 109: Initialization Procedure Of Cf Card
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 5.4 INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE OF CF CARD 5.4.1 Procedure For FP85-104 S1E This section explains how to initialize CF card. Performing this procedure, all the contents on the card will be initialized, leaving BASE System (OS) only installed. Any programs of the system, SVI files, or office data settings are not to be installed on the card.
Page 110 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server [Start] STEP 1 Turn ON a PC to be used for CF card initialization. STEP 2 Insert the installer CD-ROM (printed “BASIC SOFTWARE” on the label) to the CD/DVD drive of the PC. STEP 3 Set the PC to reboot from the CD-ROM;...
Page 111 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server STEP 6 Select US English keymap for the keyboard of the PC. • Enter “2” or “us” and press the Enter key. If wrong data or no data is entered, US English keymap is activated. Note: Please select a keymap from the following list by typ- ing in the appropriate name or number.
Page 112 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server root@(none):~# halt Execute Shut Down..When halt command is executed, turning off the power of PC and ejecting CD-ROM from PC can be Note: performed automatically. Turning off the power of PC begins approximately 30 seconds later when halt command is executed.
Page 113: Procedure For Fp85-104 S1
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 5.4.2 Procedure For FP85-104 S1 This section explains how to initialize CF card. Performing this procedure, all the contents on the card will be initialized, leaving BASE System (OS) only installed. Any programs of the system, SVI files, or office data settings are not to be installed on the card.
Page 114 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server [Start] STEP 1 Turn ON a PC to be used for CF card initialization. STEP 2 Insert the installer CD-ROM (printed “BASIC SOFTWARE” on the label) to the CD/DVD drive of the PC. STEP 3 Set the PC to reboot from the CD-ROM;...
Page 115 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server (none) login: root Login as “root”. root@(none):~# STEP 7 Enter the following command to mount CD/DVD drive. When the system is FP85-104 S1 Issue 5, this command entry is not required. Note: (root@(none):~# (root@(none):~# mount /dev/cdroms/cdrom0 /cdrom STEP 8 The following will be displayed.
Page 116 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server installation finish! Installation is finished. root@(none):~# root@(none):~# halt Execute Shut Down..When the system is FP85 104 S1 Issue 3 or earlier, execute reboot command instead of halt command. Note: installation finish! Installation is finished. root@(none):~# root@(none):~# reboot Execute Reboot.
Page 117: Unit/Circuit Card Replacement Procedure
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 6. UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 6.1 CPU Card Replacement Procedure This section explains how to replace the CPU card. This card controls the call process for the system. Be careful to handle the key operation. The mishandling may cause a critical influence to the system. Be careful to handle the key operation on the circuit card.
Page 118 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server • CPU Card Replacement Procedure for CPU Single Configuration When the system is CPU single configuration, the whole system must be shut down. WARNING [Start] STEP 1 Turn off the SV8500 server. <By PCPro Tools (recommended)> •...
Page 119 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server STEP 4 Remove the front cover. STEP 5 Remove the CF card from the CPU card. STEP 6 Loosen the screws from the CPU card. STEP 7 Pull the CPU card slowly toward you to remove from the system. STEP 8 On the new CPU card, set the switches exactly same as those of the old CPU card.
Page 120 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server • CPU Replacement Procedure for CPU Dual Configuration Replacement procedure explained here assumes the following scenario as an example: • CPU card (#1) must be replaced • CPU card (#1) is operating as ACT Therefore, in the following explanation, replace #1 with #0 as needed when performing this procedure on the actual system.
Page 121 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server • Select “System Shutdown” in “Select Processing” list box. • Click “Execute” button to shut down the system. • Make sure that “PWR” lamp goes off on the CPU card. Note Be sure to confirm “PWR” lamp is off on the CPU card before proceeding to the next step. Note: <By switch operation>...
Page 122 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server • SW01-2 (SYS SEL) on EMA card = Downward • SW01-1 (SYS LOCK) on EMA card = OFF (Downward) Normally,SW01 should be set to all OFF. Note: STEP 18 Switch over the CPU ACT/STBY to test the newly replaced CPU card. •...
Page 123: Ema Card Replacement Procedure
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 6.2 EMA Card Replacement Procedure EMA card is mounted in the telephony server. The main functions of the card are as fol- lows: ATTENTION Contents • Designation of ACT/STBY status of the CPU Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required •...
Page 124: Ema Sub Card Replacement Procedure
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 6.3 EMA SUB Card Replacement Procedure This card is used for system having PIR only. EMA SUB (EMA SUB-A/EMA SUB-B) cards are mounted on the rear side of SV8500 server. The main functions of the card are ATTENTION Contents as follows:...
Page 125: Exb (Exb-Pir/Exb-Tsw) Card Replacement Procedure
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 6.4 EXB (EXB-PIR/EXB-TSW) Card Replacement Procedure This card is used for system having PIR only. EXB (EXB-PIR/EXB-TSW) cards are mounted on the rear side of SV8500 server. The main function of the card is to provide ATTENTION Contents an interface between CPU and PIR/TSWR through Local I/O bus.
Page 126 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server EXB - Replacement Procedure for CPU Single Configuration When the system is CPU single configuration, the whole system must be shut down. WARNING [Start] STEP 1 Turn off the SV8500 server. <By PCPro Tools (recommended)> •...
Page 127 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server PIR/TSWR connector EXB card screw screw Cable support bracket D37 SC50 CA-A / D37 SC50 CA-B STEP 4 Loosen the screws on the EXB card. STEP 5 Remove the cable support bracket. STEP 6 Pull the EXB card slowly toward you.
Page 128 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server STEP 14 Make sure that the newly replaced EXB card is operating normally in the system. • “PWR” lamp lights green on the EXB card. If the lamp does not light green, make sure that the EXB card is securely inserted into the main unit. Note: STEP 15 Make test calls to see that newly replaced EXB card is operating normally.
Page 129 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server EXB - Replacement Procedure for CPU Dual Configuration [Start] Replacement procedure explained here assumes the following scenario as an example: • EXB card (#1) must be replaced • EXB card (#1) is operating as ACT Therefore, in the following explanation, replace #1 with #0 as needed when performing this procedure on the actual system.
Page 130 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server STEP 7 Insert the new EXB card by placing it on the slots of the server, and then securely insert into the connector provided on the server. STEP 8 Place the both ends of the cable support bracket on the screws. STEP 9 Fasten the EXB card by tightening the two screws onto the server.
Page 131: Ioc Card Replacement Procedure
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 6.5 IOC Card Replacement Procedure IOC card (option) is mounted on the front side of SV8500 server. One card provides four ports of serial interface. During IOC card replacement, all pieces of equipment (i.e. ATTENTION Contents PCPro, SMDR, MCI) that are connected to the IOC card cannot be used.
Page 132 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server [Start] STEP 1 Turn on MBR key (left side of SW00) on the IOC card to be replaced. Port0 Port1 Port2 Port3 CONN MBR AUX SD RD IOC card DR ER RS CD SW00 Set this key (MBR) upper position (1).
Page 133 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server STEP 4 Loosen the left side screw. STEP 5 Pull the IOC card slowly toward you to remove from the system. STEP 6 On the new IOC card, set the switches exactly same as those of the old IOC card. IOC card has S2 switch (4 - DIP switch).
Page 134: Fan Replacement Procedure
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 7. FAN REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE The section explains how to replace a FAN that is accommodated in the system cooling FAN module. A FAN can be replaced while the system is in operation. Three units of FAN are ac- ATTENTION Contents commodated as follows.
Page 135 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server STEP 3 Remove the FAN cover. PWR cable ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・...
Page 136: Test Procedure After The Replacement
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・...
Page 137: System Control Procedures
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 8. SYSTEM CONTROL PROCEDURES Although the system is maintenance free, maintenance technicians occasionally may confront a situation in which they have to manually control the system. This section describes system control procedures focusing on the following items.
Page 138 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server <1-IMG> CPU Card Changeover: The ACT/STBY of CPU card can be changed by the CMOD command or operating the MBR key on the CPU card front panel. Speech Path Changeover: The ACT/STBY of speech path system (TSW) can be changed over by the CMOD command or operating the TSW MBR key on the active TSW cir- cuit card.
Page 139 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server <4-IMG> CPU Card Changeover: The ACT/STBY of CPU card can be changed by the CMOD command or operating the MBR key on the CPU card front panel. Speech Path Changeover: The ACT/STBY of speech path system (TSW) can be changed over by the CMOD command or operating the MBR key on the active GT circuit card.
Page 140: How To Check Led
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 8.1.2 How to Check LED To determine whether the system is in normal operation or not, maintenance personnel can check LED lamps. The following shows a sample of LED indications when the system is in normal operation. Note that the sample assumes that the system is operating by CPU #0, TSW #0, and PLO #0.
Page 141 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Figure 2-8 How to Check LEDs (1-IMG) MUX ACT MUX ACT PIR3 PIR2 MUX ACT MUX ACT PIR1 MUX ACT MUX ACT Speech Path FANU PIR0 TSW ACT TSW ACT MUX ACT MUX ACT PLO ACT PLO ACT [CPU Card 1]...
Page 142 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server To perform the ACT/STBY system changeover, check the lamp indicators shown in Figure 2-9, and then operate the related key. LED indications cited in Figure 2-9 are only an example. The indicating pattern (ON/Flash/OFF) can Note: differ, depending on each system setting.
Page 143 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Figure 2-9 How to Check LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover (4-IMG: IMG2/3) PIR3 MUX ACT MUX ACT Speech Path PIR2 MUX ACT MUX ACT LED Name OPE/MB TSW ACT TSWR PIR1 MUX ACT MUX ACT Speech Path TSW0...
Page 144: How To Change Over Cpu Card
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 8.1.3 How to Change over CPU Card CPU card, when it is provided in a dual configuration, can be switched over by one of the operations shown in the table below. When the system of CPU is ATTENTION changed over, the ACT/STBY of GT (in TSWR) is also changed over (4-IMG) Contents...
Page 145 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server STEP 1 Make sure which CPU card is placed in ACT mode by checking lamp ACT lamp on the EMA card. When CPU card #0 is active, SYS0 - ACT lights green on the EMA card. Figure 2-10 CPU in ACT/STBY Mode (when #0 is ACT) ACT lamp (SYS1: CPU#1) LINK...
Page 146 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Figure 2-11 CPU Changeover by MBR Key LINE SPEED LINE SPEED STBY: LOAD LINE SPEED LINE SPEED LINE changeover LINE SPEED LINE SPEED ACT: MODE switch - 4 1 2 3 4 LOAD LINE SPEED LINE SPEED...
Page 147: How To Control Switching Block
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 8.1.4 How to Control Switching Block This section explains how to control switching block, which consists of the follow- ing cards: ATTENTION Contents • TSW (1-IMG: PH-SW10-A, etc. 4-IMG: PH-SW12) Static Sensitive Handling • MUX (PH-PC36) Precautions Required •...
Page 148: Manual Changeover Of Speech Path System
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 8.1.5 Manual Changeover of Speech Path System Speech path system can be switched over by using the CMOD command from PCPro. If the command cannot be used for some reason, do this procedure. 1-IMG Improper key operations may result in a system down.
Page 149 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server STEP 1 Make sure which TSW card is currently placed in ACT mode. When TSW is active, TSW ACT lamp on the TSW card lights green. When the TSW ACT lamp is off, the TSW card is in STBY mode. Figure 2-13 When TSW #0 is ACT side (1-IMG) TSW ACT TSW ACT...
Page 150 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server STEP 4 Return TSW MBR key downward on the TSW that was placed in ACT. STBY STBY Make sure that TSW ACT lights green on the mate TSW. TSW ACT TSW ACT TSW ACT TSW ACT TSW ACT TSW ACT...
Page 151 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server [4-IMG] To changeover the ACT/STBY of Speech Path System, the CMOD command is normally used. However, if the command cannot be used, use the key operations listed below. ACT/STBY of the Speech Path System can be changed over via the MBR key on the GT (PH-GT09) card.
Page 152 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server • Operation is required on the following cards: Target Cards for Manual System Changeover of Speech Path (4-IMG) SLOT MODULE CIRCUIT CARD TARGET CARD LOCATION NUMBER FANU 04 05 TSWR TSWR 04/05 GT (PH-GT09) SV8500 Server STEP 1 Make sure which speech path system is currently placed in ACT mode.
Page 153 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server • The following shows lamp indications on DLKC/TSW/MUX cards that are placed in STBY mode. Figure 2-16 Lamp Indication of TSW/DLKC/MUX that are in STBY Mode DLKC (PH-PC20) TSW (PH-SW12) MUX (PH-PC36) Meaning OPE/MB TSW ACT MUX ACT TSW MBR...
Page 154 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server If the MBR or MB key is set to upward, the GT card is placed in make-busy status. Return the key to the Note: original position (downward). Be sure to use “MBR” key on the ACT GT card. If “MB” key is operated before operating WARNING “MBR”...
Page 155: Manual Changeover Of Plo
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 8.1.6 Manual Changeover of PLO This section explains how to changeover Phase Lock Oscillator (PLO) card, which can be switched over independently of Speech Path System. Changeover of PLO (1-IMG Changeover of PLO (1-IMG) TYPE OPERATIONS REMARKS...
Page 156 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server STEP 2 Set PLO MBR key upward on the PLO-ACT-TSW. STEP 3 Make sure that PLO ACT lamp lights green on the mate TSW. • PLO-ACT-TSW: PLO ACT lamp goes off • mate TSW: PLO ACT lamp lights green STEP 4 Return the PLO MBR key downward on the key-operated TSW card.
Page 157 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Changeover of PLO (4-IMG) PLO can be switched over independently of Speech Path System. Changeover of Switching Block (4-IMG) TYPE OPERATIONS REMARKS - Set MB key upward on the ACT PLO card. - OPE lamp goes off when MB key is set upward on the Changeover by key opera- - Make sure that ACT lamp goes off on the card.
Page 158 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server STEP 1 Make sure which PLO is currently placed in ACT mode by checking OPE lamp. Meaning PLO ACT PLO STBY slot14 slot15 STEP 2 Set PLO MB key upward on the ACT PLO card. STEP 3 Make sure the following.
Page 159: Traffic Management
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 9. TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT To obtain the value of common equipment usage, the system provides traffic measurement feature. It can improve the system efficiency. 9.1 Kind of Traffic Measurement 9.1.1 Description of Traffic Measurement The kinds of traffic measurements are shown below. Table 2-1 Traffic Measurement Types KIND OF TYPE...
Page 160 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Table 2-1 Traffic Measurement Types KIND OF TYPE DESCRIPTION MEASUREMENT SIP Service Peg Count Measurement of the number of call originations, completed call origina- tions, call terminations, answered calls, unanswered calls, handover attempt, completed handover, registration request, succeeded Digest Authentication, failed Digest Authentication, all speech channels in busy state, and failed Keep Alive connection for SIP terminals in entire system and per SIP Server ID.
Page 161 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Listup Report for Each Traffic Measurement The following shows listup report for each Traffic Measurement. (1) Terminal Traffic Measurement The following shows Terminal Traffic Measurement Listup Report and description of symbols in the re- port.
Page 162 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server (2) Route Traffic Measurement The following shows Route Traffic Measurement Listup Report and description of symbols in the report. Page (UP) Page (Down) Save Text File [LOCALHOST::DTFA] 10, 27, 2005 * Route Traffic Data (DTF102) * Start Time: 10/27 01:01 Traffic for Route End Time: 10/27 23:59...
Page 163 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server (3) Station Peg Count The following shows Station Peg Count Listup Report and description of symbols in the report. Page (UP) Page (Down) Save Text File [LOCALHOST::DTFA] TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT 10, 27, 2005 * Display of Station Peg Count Data (DTF103) * Start Time: 10/27 21:30 End Time: 10/27 22:00 Tenant...
Page 164 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server • Outgoing : The number of times a station went off-hook and attempted outgoing C.O. lines or tie line calls. Call originations through C.O. lines or tie line are counted when a sta- tion placing a call on hold dials a station number, dead number or an attendant number.
Page 165 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server • Other Incoming : The number obtained by subtracting the number of “Ringing” from the sum of “Sta to Sta Incoming” and “Incoming”. Examples counted as “Other Incoming” calls are: -Calls encounter line busy -Calls transferred to Attendant (4) Attendant Peg Count The following shows Attendant Peg Count Listup Report and description of symbols in the report.
Page 166 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server • CCSA Common Channel Switching : Call terminations from CCSA Trunks. Available in Arrangement North America only. • Tie Line : Call terminations from tie line to Attendant. • BUSY Call Forwarding - Busy Line Forwarded call terminations to Attendant when originally called station is busy.
Page 167 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server (5) Route Peg Count The following shows Route Peg Count Listup Report and description of symbols in the report. Page (UP) Page (Down) Save Text File TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT [LOCALHOST::DTFA] 10, 27, 2005 * Display of Route Peg Count Data (DTF105) * Start Time: 10/27 16:34 End Time: 10/27 16:40 Report Type...
Page 168: Call Hold
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server • Tandem : The number of incoming calls that directly provide tandem connection (not via the Attendant Console) • Others : The number obtained by subtracting “Attendant”, “Station” and “Tan- dem” from “Incoming”. These calls include the following scenarios: -Incoming calls terminated but released before the line is connected.
Page 169 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server • Call Back Cancel : The number of times that CALL BACK [C-1] is canceled with dialing the cancellation access code CALL BACK. • Erow : The number of times that a station bridges into the busy connection with dialing access code for EXECUTIVE RIGHT-OF-WAY [E-1].
Page 170 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server • TAS Answer : The number of times that the station answers incoming external calls with dialing TRUNK ANSWER FROM ANY STATION (TAS) [T-8] access code (or with pressing Function Key/Answer Key). • Off Hook OG Queuing This count service is set when calls from stations providing OFF- HOOK QUEUING [O-7] encounter all outgoing trunks are busy.
Page 171: Incoming Calls
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Page (UP) Page (Down) Save Text File TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT [LOCALHOST::DTFA] 10, 27, 2005 * Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data (DTF301) * Start Time: 10/27 01:01 End Time: 10/27 23:59 Route UCD Group Number Incoming Calls Answered Calls Abandoned Calls...
Page 172 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Page (UP) Page (Down) Save Text File TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT [LOCALHOST::DTFA] 10, 27, 2005 * UCD Group Peg Count Data (DTF302) * Start Time: 10/27 21:30 End Time: 10/27 22:00 UCD Group Incoming Calls Answered Calls Abandoned Calls Note: The traffic data on the above report is an example.
Page 173 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server (9) UCD Station Peg Count The following shows UCD Station Peg Count Listup Report and description of symbols in the report. Page (UP) Page (Down) Save Text File TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT [LOCALHOST::DTFA] 10, 27, 2005 * UCD Station Peg Count Data (DTF303) * Start Time: 10/27 21:30 End Time: 10/27 22:00...
Page 174 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server (10) ATT Answer Peg Count The following shows ATT Answer Peg Count Listup Report and description of symbols in the report. Page (UP) Page (Down) Save Text File TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT [LOCALHOST::DTFA] 10, 27, 2005 * Attendant Answering Peg Count Data (DTF501) * Start Time: 10/27 01:01 End Time: 10/27 23:59...
Page 175 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server (11) Connection Route Peg Count The following shows Connection Route Peg Count Listup Reports and description of symbols in the report. Page (UP) Page (Down) Save Text File TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT [LOCALHOST::DTFA] 10, 27, 2005 * Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data (DTF601)* Start Time: 10/27 21:30 End Time: 10/27 22:00...
Page 176 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server (12) Connection Route Traffic The following shows Connection Route Traffic Count Listup Reports and description of symbols in the re- port. Page (UP) Page (Down) Save Text File TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT [LOCALHOST::DTFA] 10, 27, 2005 * Connectin Route Traffic Data (DTF602) * Start Time: 10/27 01:01 End Time: 10/27 23:59...
Page 177 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server (13) IP Service Peg Count The following shows IP Service Peg Count Listup Report and description of symbols in the report. Page (UP) Page (Down) Save Text File TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT [LOCALHOST::DTFA] 10, 27, 2005 * Dispaly of IP Service Peg Count Data (DTF701)* Start Time: 10/27 01:01 End Time: 10/27 23:59...
Page 178 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server • Incoming-Incomplete 1 : The number of incoming call incompletion (due to the dialing of dead number or invalid number) Note 1 • Incoming-Incomplete 2 : The number of incoming call incompletion (called party is busy, or in- coming trunk selection NG) Note 2 •...
Page 179 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server • : Fusion Point Code (FPC) for FCCS Networking via IP service. • : Point Code (PC) for CCIS Networking via IP service • NUMBER : Station or Terminal Number • Traffic Data : Traffic Data measured (15) SIP Service Peg Count The following shows description of symbols in the SIP Service Peg Count Listup Report.
Page 180 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server • Sending completion call Number of times the call originated from the SIP terminal is an- frequency swered by the destination. Also it includes the number of times the call is connected to Announcement Trunk. •...
Page 181: Operating Procedure For Pcpro
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server When this count is large in number, wrong password may be assigned to either the TP side or SIP ter- Note 4: minal side. When the TP side or the SIP terminal side of password is corrected, this situation does not occur.
Page 182 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server When ATRF/ATRFN Command is assigned to obtain the Traffic data automatically, log-in state must Note 4: be maintained continuously on the PCPro. STEP 3 Terminate all the PCPro commands. An image of a PCPro Menu is shown in Figure 2-19. Terminate all PCPro commands, and make sure no command is currently running via the Processes button.
Page 183 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server STEP 4 Set the programmed Traffic Measurement in routine operation. Click the Scan New Alarms/Traffic and Collect New Alarms buttons on the PCPro Menu (confirm the clicked buttons remain in the pressed state). Then, the Traffic Measurement is activated as programmed.
Page 184 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Figure 2-19 SV8500 PCPro Menu Display Image (Example) This Figure shows an example of PCPro menu, which should look similar to the following: Scan New Alarms/Traffic Collect New Alarms Command Entry Field Collect New Traffic Abort Data Collections View Scan Log Major Alarm Indicator...
Page 185 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Data Output - Details on DTFD/DTFDN Command To obtain the collected traffic data, use the DTFxxx or DTFxxxN command as shown below. The commands can be activated by your direct log-in operation onto the PCPro, but in normal cases, the commands are activated automatically at predetermined intervals assigned by the ATRF/ATRFN command.
Page 186 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server COMMAND MEASUREMENT “TYPE” FULL COMMAND NAME (BY ATRFN COMMAND) NAME 15 ATT Answer Peg Count DTF501N Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data for FCCS Network 18 Connection Route Peg Count Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data for FCCS Network DTF601N 19 Connection Route Traffic DTF602N...
Page 187 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Figure 2-20 DTFD Command Display Image (Example) This Figure shows the DTFD command display image (example). The DTFD/DTFDN command should look similar to this. Data collecting Log Traffic Data This area displays the current Traffic Check box to specify the Traffic Data TYPE.
Page 188 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Figure 2-21 Listup Report Window when View Database is Selected (Example) This Figure shows a sample image of the Listup Report window for the DTFD/DTFDN command. This window appears by taking the following operations, and is used to obtain a sequence of Traffic data, so far collected and stored in the database. The window is also used to save the Traffic data text (now displayed in the window) onto the desired PC directory.
Page 189 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Service Conditions (when performing Traffic Measurement via TCP/IP) Each time the system is initialized or data change is requested from the ATRFN command, the Network-level Data (NDM) for the traffic measurement order is replaced/updated. When the network-level data is once assigned via the ATRFN command, the node-level data for ATRF command cannot be changed or modified.
Page 190 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server , non-existent station number. Note 1: Dead number means lack of dialed number reason. Note 2: Incoming trunk selection NG indicates that incoming trunks are all busy or cannot be used for some The restriction by office data includes incoming call restriction at terminal side and restriction of Note 3: incoming trunk tandem connection.
Page 191: Station Message Detail Recording System (Smdr)
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 10. STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SYSTEM (SMDR) Billing information can be managed by connecting Telephony Server and an external computer (SMDR equipment). SMDR equipment and its software must be provided by the user. Note: The System provides the SMDR equipment with the following information: •...
Page 192 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server (2) Transmission Message One transmission message consists of 128 bytes of data. Each byte represents by ASCII codes the data to be transmitted (Refer to Table below). The contents of the data to be transmitted vary with the kind of call, but the first byte is always transmitted by ASCII code K (4B hex.).
Page 193 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Message Format for Outgoing Call BYTE DATA BYTE DATA BYTE DATA BYTE DATA CALLED MONTH AUTHORI- NUMBER ZATION (SEE CODE PARAGRAPH 7.2.4) ROUTE NUMBER CALL END ORIGINATING (SEE HOUR TIME TRUNK PARAGRAPH (SEE INFORMATION 7.2.3) PARAGRAPH TRUNK...
Page 194 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Message Format for Incoming Call BYTE DATA BYTE DATA BYTE DATA BYTE DATA EI-K CALLED MONTH AUTHORI- NUMBER ZATION (SEE CODE SECTION 7.2.4) ROUTE NUMBER TERMINATING CALL END (SEE TRUNK HOUR TIME SECTION INFORMATION (SEE 7.2.3) SECTION...
Page 195: Details On Transmission Data
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Message Format for Station-to-Station Call BYTE DATA BYTE DATA BYTE DATA BYTE DATA MONTH AUTHORI- TENANT (SEE ZATION SECTION CODE 7.2.4) STATION CALL END CALLED SPACE HOUR TIME (SEE PARTY ATTEND- (20 Hex.) SECTION 7.2.2) INFORMATION (SEE SECTION MINUTE...
Page 196: Call Start/Call End Time Information
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server ORIG (Originating Source Identification): 0 = Calling (or called) Party is a station 1 = Calling (or called) Party is an Attendant 2 = Calling (or called) Party is an outside (inside) party • The contents of 12th through 17th bytes vary with the type of the calling (or called) party.
Page 197 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server BYTE DATA EXAMPLE MONTH (01-12) THIS INFORMATION SHOWS THAT THE CALL (01-31) STARTED AT 1 O’CLOCK P.M. ON JUNE 1st, 1998 HOUR (00-23) MINUTE (00-59) SECOND (00-59) YEAR INFORMATION IS SENT OUT ONLY BY YEAR THE LAST TWO DIGITS AS IN ‘98 FOR 1998.
Page 198: Called Number
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 10.2.3 Called Number • The data that indicates the Called Number is as follows: BYTE DATA EXAMPLE 1st DIGIT 2nd DIGIT 9-0471-83-0351 HAS BEEN DIALED. 3rd DIGIT 4th DIGIT 5th DIGIT 9: OG ACCESS CODE SPACE 12th DIGIT SPACE...
Page 199: Route Advance Information
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server DATA BYTE EXAMPLE 1st DIGIT 2nd DIGIT 3rd DIGIT ACCOUNT CODE: 1115 HAS BEEN DIALED. 4th DIGIT 5th DIGIT SPACE 9th DIGIT SPACE 10th DIGIT SPACE An Account Code is a numerical code dialed (up to ten digits) by a station user with the capability Note: to enter a cost accounting.
Page 200: Condition B Information
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server DATA BYTE EXAMPLE 1st DIGIT ROUTE 2nd DIGIT NUMBER 1 THE CALL ORIGINATES VIA ROUTE 3 BECAUSE 3rd DIGIT ROUTE 30 IS BUSY. 1st DIGIT ROUTE 2nd DIGIT NUMBER 2 3rd DIGIT ROUTE NUMBER 1: The route that was actually used. ROUTE NUMBER 2: The route that should have been selected first.
Page 201: Office Code Of Calling (Called) Party And Billing Process Office
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server DATA BYTE EXAMPLE 1000 WHEN 5200 METERING PULSES ARE RECEIVED FROM C.O. 10.2.8 Office Code of Calling (Called) Party and Billing Process Office The 96th byte through 99th byte indicates the Office Code of Calling (Called) Party terminated via CCIS line.
Page 202 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Centralized Billing-CCS Kinds of Data KIND CONTENTS (OUTGOING) (INCOMING) (STATION) DATA Not Used Outgoing Trunk/Incoming Trunk Information Provided Provided Calling Party Information (Station Number) Provided Provided Calling Party Information (Telephone Number) Conditionally Conditionally Provided Provided Called Party Information (Station Number) Provided...
Page 203 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Centralized Billing-CCS Kinds of Data (Continued) KIND CONTENTS (OUTGOING) (INCOMING) (STATION) DATA Condition D Information + Bill Notification Attendant Conditionally Console Number Provided Department Code Conditionally Provided Automatic Number Indication Conditionally Conditionally Provided Provided Converted Number Conditionally Provided...
Page 204 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Message Format for Outgoing Call - FCCS Byte Data Byte Data Byte Data Byte Data Byte Data Billing Calling Condition Informa- Party Minute MA-ID C Informa- tion MA-ID /Call (Max. 5 Second digits) Outgoing Milli-Sec- Route For more...
Page 205 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Message Format for Incoming Call - FCCS Byte Data Byte Data Byte Data Byte Data Authorization Call Authori- Incoming Logical Code Start zation Route Month RT No. 1 Time Code MA-ID MA-ID (Max. 5 FPC2 (Max.
Page 206 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Message Format for Station-to-Station Call - FCCS Byte Data Byte Data Byte Data (3 digits) Called Party Information (Telephone No.) Telephone Number Calling (Max. 16 Party ORIG (Note) digits) Condition B Information Information Tenant (Station No.) Note (3 digits)
Page 207 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Reference Data = 02: Calling Party Information (Station Number) Station No. Tenant ATTCON No. RT / TK No. (3 digits) (6 digits) ORIG: Originating Source Identification ORIG = 0: Transmitted data depicts information on Station ORIG = 1: Transmitted data depicts information on Attendant Console ORIG = 2:...
Page 208 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Data = 09: Alternate Routing Information (KK) / Incoming Route Number (KL) FPC1 Physical Logical FPC2 Physical Logical (3 digits) RT 1 RT 1 (3 digits) RT 2 RT 2 FPC1: FPC actually used Physical Route 1: Physical route actually used Logical Route 1:...
Page 209 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Data = 14: Condition D Information + Bill Notification ATT CON Number Bill Notification • ATTCON Number Bill Notification (by ATTCON) Not Available Bill Notification (by ATTCON) Not Applied Bill Notification (by ATTCON) Available Data = 16: Automatic Number Indication Automatic Number Indication (maximum 32 digits) * Information Element Identifier =...
Page 210: Redundant Data Memory Backup For Office Data
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 11. REDUNDANT DATA MEMORY BACKUP FOR OFFICE DATA 11.1 Overview ATTENTION Contents Original office data and its redundant data can be managed in two different data drives (usu- Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required ally Drive B and C), to deal with failure causing the data loss. In this way, for example, even when office data is lost due to failure occurring while the office data is being updated, the pre- vious office data can be easily loaded because it is already managed in another drive.
Page 211: Programming
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server data is loaded or saved last time. In FCCS system, redundant Data Memory can be applied to all nodes by logging in Network Control Node (NCN). Office data in Drive B of the CF card will be loaded in the following situation. •...
Page 212: Rtp Information Output
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 12. RTP INFORMATION OUTPUT This feature is used to output log that includes the causes of low voice quality and abnormal status of IP device. Therefore, network administrator will be able to understand its cause and figure out how to solve the problem. For more information such as available firmware version, please refer to [R-58] RTP Information Out- Note 1: put in Data Programming Manual - Business.
Page 213: How To Display Log
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 12.1How to Display Log To operate the speech log output For SNMP Manager, see SNMP [S-148] of Data Programming Manual - Business. For PCPro, see the command in this manual. To operate the fault log output For SNMP Manager, see SNMP [S-148] of Data Programming Manual - Business.
Page 214: Use Of Collected Information
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 12.1.1 Use of Collected Information The following information is displayed on SNMP Manager. • Speech Log Information CALL STATISTICS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K The following is an example. CALL STATISTICS 00012060,00012061,0,2004051813121700, 2004051813141800,0000001F,0000000A,00000000,0A29CF64,0060B9C39B2 C,0001...
Page 215 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server B: Mate-EN: 0x00012061 [FPC=1, Module Group(MG)=8, Unit(U)=0, Group(G)=12, Level(L)=1] C: Warning Tone (0: No warning tone/1: warning tone generated) 0x0 = No warning tone In the following terminals, even though the warning tone is generated, 0 will be output. Note: •...
Page 216 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Examples of Log Example 1 CALL STATISTICS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K CALL STATISTICS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K CALL STATISTICS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K CALL STATISTICS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K CALL STATISTICS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K CALL STATISTICS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K...
Page 217 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Example 2 CALL STATISTICS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K CALL STATISTICS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K CALL STATISTICS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K CALL STATISTICS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K CALL STATISTICS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K CALL STATISTICS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K...
Page 218 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Example 3 CALL STATISTICS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K CALL STATISTICS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K CALL STATISTICS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K CALL STATISTICS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K CALL STATISTICS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K CALL STATISTICS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K...
Page 219 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server • Fault Log Information The fault log is read out as follows: This is an example when the system outputs 36-N. Note that the format is variable. Note: The following is an example. SYSTEM MESSAGE 36-N IP Equipment Status Report Main Office LTS May 18 13:12 LP08-0-ACT Header...
Page 220 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server System message for DtermIP (SIP)/Soft Phone (SIP) is as follows. Note: SYSTEM MESSAGE 36-N IP Equipment Status Report Main Office LTS May 18 13:12 LP08-0-ACT Header 1: 6020 0100 820A 29CF 2:C900 0000 0003 0200 3:0000 0000 0000 0000 [19] [20] [21]...
Page 221 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server [2]: Sequence Number and Fault Log Output Kind Sequence Number (Bit0-6) = 0x01 (Sequence Number1)/0x02 (Sequence Number2) Fault Log Output Kind (Bit7): 0/1 = Period/at the moment after registry [3]: IP Address Convert the value to decimal on a byte basis to obtain IP Address. 0x0A29CFC9 =10.41.207.201 [4]: Fault Log: 0x01 This data and the following data ([5] to [19]) are variable.
Page 222 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Table 2-2 Detailed Information of Reset Factors Sub Factors Major Factors Item DtermIP (Proprietary Protocol) DtermIP (SIP)/Soft Phone (SIP) (Hex) Not used before registra- During “DHCP Connecting..” Failure before registration such as fail- tion/ indication, the terminal was placed in ure while acquiring DHCP address, before DRS01...
Page 223 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server [12]: Protocol 0x01/0x02/0x03 = iLP-PM/PROTIMS/SIP [13]: Total Number of Transmitted Control PKTs 0x10000000 = 10 times [14]: Number of Retransmitted Control PKTs 0x09000000 = 9 times [15]: Number of Failed Control PKTs 0x00000000 = None [16]: Total Number of Received Control PKTs 0x00000000 = None [17]: Number of Received Abnormal PKTs...
Page 224 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Table 2-3 Send/Receive Control Packet Counter on each Protocol Sent/ DtermIP (SIP)/ Received iLP-PM (0x01) PROTIMS (0x02) Soft Phone (SIP) Control (0x04) Packets Information [13] Total Number of Transmit- Total Number of Transmit- Number of Transmitted ted Control PKTs ted Packets Requests...
Page 225 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Example of System Message Output The following is an example when fault logs are output eight times. One data can be made by connecting three related messages in the example. This shows the appropriate parts extracted from the system messages. Eight fault logs and eight reset factors exist in the messages.
Page 226 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server • Information Displayed on SNMP Manager 36-N IP Equipment Status Report A B C D E F G H I J A: CPU Number B: Output Time C: Self-EN D: Output Time F: Reset Factor G: Reset Execution Time H: RTCP Send Time I: RTCP Receive Time...
Page 227 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Examples of Log Example 1 When messages are output immediately [NON] LP00-0-ACT after registry. 36-N IP Equipment Status Report A B C D E F G H I J 36-N IP Equipment Status Report A B C D E F G H I J 36-N IP Equipment Status Report A B C D E F G H I J 36-N IP Equipment Status Report A B C D E F G H I J 36-N IP Equipment Status Report A B C D E F G H I J...
Page 228 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Example 2 When messages are output immediately [NON] LP00-0-ACT after registry. 36-N IP Equipment Status Report A B C D E F G H I J 36-N IP Equipment Status Report A B C D E F G H I J 36-N IP Equipment Status Report A B C D E F G H I J 36-N IP Equipment Status Report A B C D E F G H I J 36-N IP Equipment Status Report A B C D E F G H I J...
Page 229 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Example 3 When messages are output immediately [NON] LP00-0-ACT after registry. 36-N IP Equipment Status Report A B C D E F G H I J 36-N IP Equipment Status Report A B C D E F G H I J 36-N IP Equipment Status Report A B C D E F G H I J 36-N IP Equipment Status Report A B C D E F G H I J 36-N IP Equipment Status Report A B C D E F G H I J...
Page 230: Examples Of Using Logs
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 12.1.2 Examples of Using Logs <Trouble 1 - When All of the DtermIP are logged out- > (1) Brief All the DtermIP are not available for a short time. (2) Cause Because DHCP server had sent back NACK, DtermIP has performed autonomous reset. (3) If Fault Log Collection Function is used From logs occurred when re-registration has been completed, it can be analyzed that all of the DtermIPs have performed autonomous reset around the same time because the valid term for IP addresses provided by DHCP...
Page 231 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server <Trouble 3 -Network Busy-> (1) Brief Network Busy is often displayed on LCD of DtermIP. (2) Cause Packets are discarded on network devices. (3) When Fault Log Collection Function is used By confirming retransmission times/retransmission failed times from collected logs, it can be determined that the problem could be caused on network and SV8500/PHD sides.
Page 232 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server <Trouble 5 -Sudden Reset/Sudden Login- > (1) Brief IP terminal has suddenly reset itself. (2) Examination Method Confirm the reset factor/generation time by using Fault Log Collection Function. Use fault logs to solve the problem. <Trouble 6 -Buttons cannot be activated- >...
Page 233: Dterm Ip Call Information Display
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 13. DTERM IP CALL INFORMATION DISPLAY During conversation, real-time Call Information (Codec, Payload Size, Lost Packet, etc.) can be displayed in LCD on DtermIP by pressing Call Information Display Key assigned as FKY or Soft Key. The Call Information is automatically updated every five seconds.
Page 234: Ip Device Pc Port Remote Control
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 14. IP DEVICE PC PORT REMOTE CONTROL 14.1Overview This feature allows the maintenance personnel to disconnect/connect the PC port of the IP Stations from/ to the network using PCPro. For example, the maintenance personnel can quickly disconnect the PC (that is connected to the PC port of IP Station) from the network when virus is detected on the network.
Page 235 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server When “Automatic” is not selected, the status of the PC port follows the configuration setting. After the registration: Note: If the terminal which does not support this feature is instructed to disconnect its PC port by the system, a mismatch between the CPCP command setting and the status of the PC port may occurs.
Page 236: License Registration Information Display
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 15. LICENSE REGISTRATION INFORMATION DISPLAY 15.1 Overview License registration information, including the number of license, the number of registered IP terminals, and the number of consumed license, are displayed in this feature. By reading out the license registration information, maintenance personnel can analyze the terminal configuration for terminal types and can grasp the current terminal registration state.
Page 237: Ftp Server Support (Lan1)
16. FTP SERVER SUPPORT (LAN1) When Telephony Server is used as an FTP server, the following file transfer services are supported between a remote PC and CF cards. • IP Terminal Program Upload/Download During “Terminal for Download” operation by ATDL command, new firmware supposed to be download- ed to IP Stations can be uploaded to Telephony Server using the FTP server process.
Page 238: Service Conditions
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server STEP 3 Type the command “bin” to prepare to transfer the files in binary. ftp>bin STEP 4 Type the command “put” to upload a program file to FTP server (Telephony Server). Example) Transfer “itlisipe.tgz” from the remote PC to the directory of Telephony Server. itlisipe.tgz ftp>put STEP 5...
Page 239 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server Command List Related FTP (Continued) COMMAND MEANING DESCRIPTION Write the files into FTP server (Telephony Server). Show the full path. “ls” shows a list of files and sub directories. ls/dir Show the files in the directory. “dir”...
Page 240: Programming
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server 16.3Programming FTP Server Startup Assignment STEP 1 Select LAN1 for Select LAN Interface. STEP 2 On Options tab, select “Activation setting of Internal server” in function list of LAN1 field, and then click the Execute button. STEP 3 On Activation setting of Internal server window, check the checkbox of “FTP Server”...
Page 241 CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server STEP 2 On Options tab, select “Maintenance User Account Settings” in function list of LAN1 field. Then operate the following procedure. <To inactivate FTP server on the maintenance user account> Select the maintenance user account to inactivate FTP server, and click the Edit button. Check the checkbox of “FTP”...
Page 242: Chapter 3 System Messages
System messages display during routine diagnosis, system operation status controlling, and fault occurrence. Figure below shows an example of a system message. System Message Example SYSTEM MESSAGE 3-E SUP LOCK UP FAILURE (TEMPORARY) NEC TOKYO JUL 24 09:35 LP00-0-ACT 1:1102 0000 0000 0000...
Page 243: Collection Of System Messages
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 2. Collection of System Messages This section explains how to collect the System Messages by the PCPro. • Automatic Output to the PCPro System Messages can be output by Fault Scanning function. • Output by DFTD command System Messages can be output by DFTD command.
Page 244 CHAPTER 3 System Messages DFTD Screen Image The following explains each button on DFTD command: Read Messages: Display all the System Messages which are currently occurring. These messages are stored in the database in the PC. Cancel: Close the DFTD command. (The data in the database is not cleared.) Stop: Abort the readout of the System Message(s).
Page 245 CHAPTER 3 System Messages (b) To Export (Save) System Message into Text File STEP 1 After reading out the System Messages by DFTD, click “View Database” button to display a listup report similar to the following. Figure 3-1 How to Export: Listup Report Screen Image Click this button to export the stored system messages.
Page 246: System Messages
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 3. System Messages This section explains how to read and analyze system messages displayed during routine diagnosis, system operation status controlling, and occurrence of a fault within the system. The following table provides a list of system messages.
Page 247 CHAPTER 3 System Messages System Messages List (Continued) MESSAGE NO. SYSTEM MESSAGE Ground Failure Digital Line Warning Digital Line Failure Digital Line Restore Line Fault Line Fault Release Both TSW Ready Failure TSW Ready Failure DLKC Ready Failure (4-IMG only) IO Ready Failure for UAP Note 3 MUX Ready Failure Both MUX Ready Failure...
Page 248 CHAPTER 3 System Messages System Messages List (Continued) MESSAGE NO. SYSTEM MESSAGE CPU MBR Key Turn OFF TSW MBR Key Turn ON TSW MBR Key Turn OFF TSW PLO Key Turn ON TSW PLO Key Turn OFF PM MB Key Turn ON PM MB Key Turn OFF NCU MB Key Turn ON NCU MB Key Turn OFF...
Page 249 CHAPTER 3 System Messages System Messages List (Continued) MESSAGE NO. SYSTEM MESSAGE 13-F CCH B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Permanent) 13-G CCH B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Temporary) 13-H CCS Link Failure (Permanent) 13-I CCS Link Failure (Temporary) 13-J Restoration From CCS Link Failure 13-K CCH Reset Interrupt Failure 13-N...
Page 250 CHAPTER 3 System Messages System Messages List (Continued) MESSAGE NO. SYSTEM MESSAGE 23-K ATM Interface Failure Note 1 23-L ATM Interface Recovered Note 1 23-P DCH Back-Up Automatic Change Start/End 23-Q DCH Back-Up Manual Change Start/End 23-R ATM Interface Change Report Note 1 23-S FCH Failure Note 1 23-T...
Page 251 CHAPTER 3 System Messages System Messages List (Continued) MESSAGE NO. SYSTEM MESSAGE 33-S IP PKG Failure 33-T IP PKG Restore 33-U H.323 Information 35-A GK Operation Start Notification 35-B GK Operation Stop Notification 35-C SP Warning Notification 35-D SP Failure 35-E SP Failure Recovery 35-F...
Page 252: C Reset Interrupt
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 0-C: Reset Interrupt Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the processor is reset due to a failure in the system. 1: XXXX XX00 XXXX XX00 2: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Self-CPU Restart Information...
Page 253 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Data Load Result after restart Office Data Load Status processing 0/1 = Normal End/Abnormal End Call Forwarding Data Load Status 0/1 = Normal End/Abnormal End SPD Data Load Status 0/1 = Normal End/Abnormal End RCF Data Load Status b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 0/1 = Normal End/Abnormal End NDD Data Load Status...
Page 254: D Cpu Clock Down
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 0-D: CPU Clock Down Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a fault has occurred to the clock oscillator in the CPU. 1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Self-CPU Restart Information...
Page 255: E C-Level Infinite Loop
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 0-E: C-Level Infinite Loop Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified C-Level infinite loop is a state where a clock-level program, running under clock interrupt disable state, is in an infinite loop. This message displays when the counter value to check the normality of the processing has become abnormal.
Page 256 0/1 = -/FUSE Alarm 0/1 = -/TEMP MJ Alarm 0/1 = -/TEMP MN Alarm 0/1 = -/Parity Alarm 0/1 = Card is not mounted/mounted 0/1 = -/EMA CLK Alarm Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers – 209 –...
Page 257: F Memory Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 0-F: Memory Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a CPU memory read/write error occurs. 0-F Memory Failure 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 6: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 7: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 8: XX00 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Information on Self-CPU Restart...
Page 258 0/1 = -/Power Alarm 0/1 = -/FUSE Alarm 0/1 = -/TEMP MJ Alarm 0/1 = -/TEMP MN Alarm 0/1 = -/Parity Alarm 0/1 = Card is not mounted/mounted 0/1 = -/EMA CLK Alarm Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers – 211 –...
Page 259: G B1-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 0-G: B1-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a B-Level infinite loop failure occurs. 0-F Memory Failure 1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Information on Self-CPU Restart...
Page 260: H B1-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 0-H: B1-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when, in the CPU program processing, the counter value to check the normality of the processing has become abnormal. 1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Self-CPU Restart Information...
Page 261: I Mate Cpu Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 0-I: Mate CPU Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a fault, such as the Clock down or C-Level infinite loop error, has occurred. 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Mate-CPU Restart Information...
Page 262: J Abnormal Interrupt
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 0-J: Abnormal Interrupt Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when Central Processing Unit (CPU) has been abnormally interrupted in the process. If the system receives this event, the system automatically executes the following actions depending the event count.
Page 263 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Self-CPU Restart Information 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart 0/1 = -/Initialization b5 b4 0/1 = -/Data Copy restart (for Dual-CPU system only) 0/1 = -/MB control 0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart) Mate-CPU Restart Information 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart (FF H: not mounted) 0/1 = -/Initialization...
Page 264: A Both Tsw Failure (Permanent)
Status at the time of fault detection 0/1 = TSW System 0/TSW System 1 Speech Path in ACT status 0/1 = System 0/System 1 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers Reference: See section 4.5.3 on page 633, for the repair procedure.
Page 265: B Tsw Failure (Permanent)
Status at the time of fault detection 0/1 = TSW 0/TSW 1 0/1 = Speech Path in ACT status System 0/System 1 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers Reference: See Speech Path System Fault - STBY Side Has Become Fault for the repair procedure.
Page 266: C Both Tsw Write Failure
0/1 = TSW 0/TSW 1 detected 0/1 = TSW 0/TSW 1 0/1 = Speech Path in ACT status System 0/System 1 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers Reference: See Speech Path System Fault - Fault Related to Speech, Control System Fault - Fault Occurs Intermittently on ACT sidefor the repair procedure.
Page 267: D Tsw Write Failure
Status at the time of fault detection 0/1 = TSW 0/TSW 1 0/1 = Speech Path ACT status TSW System 0 is ACT/TSW System 1 is ACT Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers Reference: See Chapter 5 Speech Path System Fault - Fault Related to Speech,...
Page 268: E Both Tsw Clock Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 1-E: Both TSW Clock Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the system detects a clock failure, such as TSW internal clock down or Frame Head down, in both systems. 1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 269: F Tsw Clock Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 1-F: TSW Clock Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the system detects a clock failure, such as TSW internal clock down or Frame Head down, in one of the dual systems. 1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 270: O Both Plo Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 1-O: Both PLO Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the system detects a fault, such as input clock all down or output clock down in the PLO cards, at both sides. 1: XXXX XXXX XX00 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 271 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Scan Data 1: Current Status of PLO Clock status at time of detection card 0/1 = STBY/ACT Circuit Card status at time of detection b6 b5 b4 0/1 = PLO synchronizing/PLO self running or drift abnormal 0/1 = -/Input clock down b3, b4: Route of Input clock ROUTE OF INPUT...
Page 272: P Plo Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 1-P: PLO Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the system detects all the failures concerned with input clock down or output clock down in the PLO card at the ACT side. When this message is indicated, the PLO card changeover executes. The PLO Card 0 automatically changes over to 1.
Page 273 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Scan Data 1: Status of PLO card Clock status at time of detection 0/1 = STBY/ACT b6 b5 b4 Circuit card at time of detection 0/1 = PLO synchronizing/PLO self running or drifting 0/1 = -/Input clock down b3, b4: Route of Input clock ROUTE OF INPUT DCS INPUT ROUTE...
Page 274: S Module Group Down Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 1-S: Module Group Down Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a fault of the speech path system has occurred in a specific Module Group. The specific Module Group is placed into make-busy state. 1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 275: T Tsw Act Change Report
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 1-T: TSW ACT Change Report Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the changeover of the TSW system is executed. 1: XXXX 0000 XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 XXXX XXXX 9 10 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 276 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Reason for changeover b6 b5 b4 b7-b4 b3-b0 CARD CONTENTS I/O Alarm 32ch Clock down, FH down 24ch Clock down, FH down TSW SW Memory write failure I/O Alarm release 32ch Clock down recovered, FH down recovered 24ch Clock down recovered, FH down recovered TSW MBR key OFF...
Page 277 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Status of STBY-side TSW card MG 00 MG 01 MG 02 MG 03 MG 04 MG 05 MG 06 MG 07 b7-b4 b3-b0 b0-b3, b4-b7: The status of TSW card in each MG (00~07) 0000 = Normal 0001 = Abnormal (Impossible to make links) –...
Page 278: U Dlkc Data Transfer Failure (Permanent)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 1-U: DLKC Data Transfer Failure (Permanent) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when DLKC data transfer failure (temporary), shown in System Message [1-V], occurs more than 16 times an hour. At this time, the faulty DLKC card is down and its switching network automatically changes over.
Page 279: V Dlkc Data Transfer Failure (Temporary)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 1-V: DLKC Data Transfer Failure (Temporary) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a data sending error or no answer error occurs at the time of data transfer from CPU to DLKC card. 1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 280: W Plo Restore
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 1-W: PLO Restore Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a failure such as internal clock down occurred to PLO is restored. 1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Restoration of PLO fault...
Page 281: B C-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 3-B: C-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a C-Level program abnormal state is detected as permanent. When the Port Microprocessor (PM) on an LC/TRK card detects the abnormal state, the PM places the card into make-busy status.
Page 282: C C-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 3-C: C-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when C-Level program is detected as abnormal by the Port Microprocessor (PM) mounted on an LC/TRK card. If the failure occurs less than 15 times/hour, and a B-monitor/Initial restart executes as the result, the failure is judged as temporary and this message is created.
Page 283: D Lock-Up Failure (Permanent)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 3-D: Lock-Up Failure (Permanent) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified At the periodic interval, the CPU sends diagnosis data to the Port Microprocessor (PM) on LC/TRK cards in order to monitor the PM. If the CPU cannot receive the return data within a predetermined period of time, the system displays this data.
Page 284: E Lock-Up Failure (Temporary)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 3-E: Lock-Up Failure (Temporary) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified At the periodic interval, the CPU sends diagnosis data to the Port Microprocessor (PM) on LC/TRK cards in order to monitor the PM. If the CPU cannot receive the return data within a predetermined period of time, the system displays this data.
Page 285: F -48V Over Current
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 3-F: -48V Over Current Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when over current of the operating power (DC-48V) is supplied from the ATI/ELC circuit card to the Attendant Console/Dterm. When this fault occurs, the related circuit card is placed into make- busy state and stops supplying power.
Page 286: G Ground Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 3-G: Ground Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a wire of the line between the LC circuit card and the telephone set is short-circuited with ground. 1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Location of faulty circuit card...
Page 287: H Digital Line Warning
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 3-H: Digital Line Warning Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the DTI card detects an abnormal state of a digital line, but this failure has no influence on the speech path. When the status worsens, the system issues [3-I] Digital Line Failure message. 1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 288: I Digital Line Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 3-I: Digital Line Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays after [3-H] Digital Line Warning lasts in the DTI card over the particular time. This failure may cause a speech path fault to the DTI card. 1: XXXX 0000 XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 4: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 289 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Location of faulty circuit card (This b0, b1: Unit number data is valid when is 0FH) b2-b7: MG number b6 b5 b4 – 242 –...
Page 290: J Digital Line Restore
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 3-J: Digital Line Restore Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a digital line fault is restored. 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Location of faulty line...
Page 291: K Line Fault
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 3-K: Line Fault Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message indicates that A wire and B wire of the line between the LC circuit card and telephone set is short- circuiting with each other This message is available in Australia only.
Page 292: L Line Fault Release
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 3-L: Line Fault Release Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message indicates that A wire and B wire of the line between the LC circuit card and telephone set, which once short-circuited (cf. 3-K “Line Fault” (Page 240)), have become normal.) This message is available in Australia only.
Page 293: C Both Tsw Ready Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 4-C: Both TSW Ready Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a Ready Failure occurs in both systems as a result of the TSW card having a failure or the card is not mounted properly. 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 294: D Tsw Ready Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 4-D: TSW Ready Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a Ready Failure occurs in one of the dual systems because the TSW card fails or the card is not mounted properly. 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 295: Q Dlkc Ready Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 4-Q: DLKC Ready Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when I/O Ready Failure occurs on a DLKC card. 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Details on faulty DLKC card...
Page 296: S Mux Ready Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 4-S: MUX Ready Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the MUX (PH-PC36) card has a Ready Failure in one of the dual systems. When the card is not ready for service because of the failure or because the card is not mounted properly, the system creates this message.
Page 297: T Both Mux Ready Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 4-T: Both MUX Ready Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the MUX card has a Ready Failure in both of the dual systems. When the card is not ready for service because of the failure or because the card is not mounted properly, the system creates this system message.
Page 298: U Pci Card Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 4-U: PCI Card Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a PCI card failure occurs. 1: 0X0X XX0X XX0X XX00 2: 000X XX00 000X XX0X 3: XX00 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Detection of LAN connector fault...
Page 299 CHAPTER 3 System Messages LAN3 connector fault status: 0/1 = -/Link fault P-Bus Link fault 0/1 = -/Late Collision fault 0/1 = -/Parallel fault 0/1 = -/Transmission Speed fault LAN3 connector fault status: 0/1 = -/Carrier loss P-Bus Link fault 0/1 = -/Initial fault LAN2 connector fault status: 0/1 = -/Link fault Note 1...
Page 300 CHAPTER 3 System Messages LAN4 connector fault status: 0/1 = -/Link fault F-Bus Link fault 0/1 = -/Late Collision fault 0/1 = -/Parallel fault 0/1 = -/Transmission Speed fault LAN4 connector fault status: 0/1 = -/Carrier loss F-Bus Link fault 0/1 = -/SQE test error 0/1 = -/Jabber error 0/1 = -/Initial fault...
Page 301: V Pci Card Failure Recovered
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 4-V: PCI Card Failure Recovered Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the PCI card, which was detected as faulty, is recovered. 1: 0X0X 0X0X 0X00 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Detection of LAN connector fault...
Page 302: W Tsw Ready Failure Restore
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 4-W: TSW Ready Failure Restore Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message is displayed when TSW Ready failure is restored. 1: XXXX 0XX0 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Information on TSW Ready failure...
Page 303 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Related call release result 0/1 = Released/Not released – 256 –...
Page 304: A System Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 6-A: System Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified (FIXED)NON (FIXED)3 This message displays when any of the following faults are detected: • Power failure • FAN failure • Fuse blowing • In-Frame abnormal temperature 1: XX00 XXXX 00XX XX00 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 305 CHAPTER 3 System Messages When FAN failure is detected, the alarm lamps light as the following, according to the nature of its fail- Note 2: ure. (1) When FAN failure is detected in any of the IMG, TSWR, or MISCR, MN lamp turns on. (2) When either one of the three CPU FANs is faulty, MN lamp turns on.
Page 306: B Rgu & Howler Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 6-B: RGU & Howler Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a fault in either the ringer or howler tone occurs in the PWR card. 1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Unit and MG number of fault...
Page 307: C Line Load Control Start
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 6-C: Line Load Control Start Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the CPU usage (occupancy) rate exceeds the value assigned to ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 56, and the call origination from the pre-selected group of stations is restricted (i.e., Line Load Control is set).
Page 308: D Line Load Control Stop
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 6-D: Line Load Control Stop Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the CPU usage (occupancy) rate becomes lower than the value assigned to ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 57, and Line Load Control is cancelled. This system message is always indicated as 0. 1: 0000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 309: H Bad Call Notification
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 6-H: Bad Call Notification Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays to indicate the result of Bad Call Notification. 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 b0-b3: Station number digit with the fault.
Page 310 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Called station number (See table.) b4-b7 b0-b3 b6 b5 b4 Time Slot Number of Link 1 Time Slot Number of Link 2 – 263 –...
Page 311 CHAPTER 3 System Messages When type of connection is Trunk connection Station number (See table.) b4-b7 b0-b3 b6 b5 b4 Remote Route number b0-b5: Route (1-63) b6 b5 b4 0/1 = Data in OPRT is invalid/valid 0/1 = Internal trunk/External trunk Remote Route number b0-b3: OPRT Route (Over 64) Called Trunk number...
Page 312 CHAPTER 3 System Messages When type of connection is ACD Trunk connection ACD Trouble Kind b0-b7: ACD trouble kind 01H=ACD trunk trouble key Note 1 14H=ACD reset start Note 2 15H=Insufficient ACD memory 16H=Insufficient ACD call record 17H=Excessive business station on ACD calls 18H=Excessive calls queued 21H=Unknown Pilot number called Note 3 24H=Illegal execution of ACD timeout procedure Note 4...
Page 313 CHAPTER 3 System Messages When (ACD Trouble Kind) is 24 or 99 HEX: Note 4: Not used Error Counter When (ACD Trouble Kind) is 30 HEX: Note 5: Pointer Address Not used Error Kind When (ACD Trouble Kind) is 33 HEX: Note 6: ACDP Data Memory 00 = Used...
Page 314: I Sta-Test Connection Data
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 6-I: STA-Test Connection Data Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays to indicate the result of a designated connection test (Individual Trunk Access) from a station. Table 1: 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX 00XX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 9 10 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 315 CHAPTER 3 System Messages b0-b3: Number of digits of the testing station number b4-b7: Error Numbers (See table.) b6 b5 b4 Error Numbers and Their Meanings ERROR MEANING The testing station is restricted from activating the service. Route Number error of the designated trunk Trunk Number error of the designated trunk Trunk busy Sender busy...
Page 316 CHAPTER 3 System Messages OPTN data b0-b3: Tenant (Over 15) Tested Route number b0-b5: Route (1-63) Note b6 b5 b4 0/1 = Data in OPRT( ) is invalid/valid 0/1 = Internal trunk/External trunk When Logical Routes are assigned, Logical Route Numbers are displayed here. Note: OPRT data >...
Page 317 CHAPTER 3 System Messages (a) Dialed Number sent by the test Trunk/Sender (b) Dial Number received by the test Register b4-b7 b0-b3 b4-b7 b0-b3 b4-b7 b0-b3 DC12 DC13 DC14 DC15 DC16 DC17 DC18 DC19 DC20 DC21 DC10 DC11 DC10 DC11 –...
Page 318: J Emergency Call
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 6-J: Emergency Call Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a call terminates to the Emergency Telephone. 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 10 11 12 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 319: L Emergency Control Start
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 6-L: Emergency Control Start Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the LCR-Attendant Manual Override is set at the Attendant Desk Console. 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Route Selection Time Pattern...
Page 320: M Emergency Control Stop
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 6-M: Emergency Control Stop Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the LCR-Attendant Manual Override is cancelled at the Attendant Desk Console. 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Suspension of Emergency Control...
Page 321: N Abnormal Call Duration Data
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 6-N: Abnormal Call Duration Data Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the system detects abnormal duration in the line connection between the calling and called party. When the calling and called party establish a line connection and continue the hook-up for an extremely short or long period of time [predetermined by the ASYD command (SYS1, INDEX 45, 46)], this message is created.
Page 322 CHAPTER 3 System Messages When calling party is ATTCON/DESKCON Attendant/Desk console number (See table.) b4- b7 b0-b3 b6 b5 b4 When calling party is Trunk Route and Trunk number (See table.) b0-b7 Route (HEX) Note Route (HEX) Note Trunk (HEX) Trunk (HEX) Note: Route (a)
Page 323 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Called Party Information Station to Station Call Type of called party b4-b7 b0-b3 00 = Station 01 = Attendant Console Tenant Tenant b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 OG Call to outside (IC Call from outside) b4-b7 b0-b3 b0-b7...
Page 324: O Smdr Output Buffer Overflow Alarm
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 6-O: SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Alarm Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the SMDR output buffer usage rate has exceeded the value assigned to ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 249. 1: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Detail Information...
Page 325 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Buffer Usage Rate Assigned by b0-b3: Units ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 249 b4-b7: Tens b6 b5 b4 Buffer Usage Rate Assigned by b0-b3: Units ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 250 b4-b7: Tens b6 b5 b4 (b) FS = 1, FE = 0 Fault Grade by ALMG command 00 = NON CONT 01 = SUP...
Page 326 CHAPTER 3 System Messages (c) FS = 2, FE = 0 SMDR Group number b0-b3: SMDR Group number to which failure occurred Port number b0-b7: Port number allocated for SMDR Group to which failure occurred (0-7) b6 b5 b4 (d) FS = 3, FE = 0 b0-b3: SMDR Group number to which failure occurred –...
Page 327: P Smdr Output Buffer Overflow Release
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 6-P: SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Release Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the SMDR output buffer usage rate has been lowered to less than the value assigned in the ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 250 after the rate exceeds the value assigned by INDEX 249. 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 328: A System Initialize With Data Load
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 7-A: System Initialize With Data Load Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays after the office data is loaded and system initialization has executed. 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Initial Information...
Page 329 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Load Status Office Data Load Status 0/1 = Load OK/NG Call Forwarding Data Load Status 0/1 = Load OK/NG SPD Data Load Status 0/1 = Load OK/NG b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 RCF Data Load Status 0/1 = Load OK/NG Name Display Data Load Status 0/1 = Load OK/NG...
Page 330: B System Initialize
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 7-B: System Initialize Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when system initialization is activated. 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 0/1 = IPL KEY/PCPro INITIAL 0/1 = Program Load/Non Load...
Page 331 CHAPTER 3 System Messages 7-C: CPU MBR Key Turn ON Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the MBR switch on the Telephony Server is turned ON at the time of system changeover or speech path changeover. 1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 332: D Cpu Mbr Key Turn Off
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 7-D: CPU MBR Key Turn OFF Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the MBR switch on the Telephony Server is turned OFF at the time of system changeover or speech path changeover. 1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 333 CHAPTER 3 System Messages 7-E: TSW MBR Key Turn ON Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the MBR switch on the TSW card is turned ON at CPU changeover or speech path changeover. 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 System status of TSW card...
Page 334: F Tsw Mbr Key Turn Off
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 7-F: TSW MBR Key Turn OFF Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the MBR switch on the TSW card is turned OFF at CPU changeover or speech path changeover. 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 System status of TSW card...
Page 335 CHAPTER 3 System Messages 7-G: TSW PLO Key Turn ON Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the PLO MBR switch on TSW is turned ON (UP). 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Information on PLO MBR operation...
Page 336: H Tsw Plo Key Turn Off
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 7-H: TSW PLO Key Turn OFF Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the PLO MBR switch on TSW is turned OFF (DOWN). 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Information on PLO MBR operation...
Page 337 CHAPTER 3 System Messages 7-K: PM MB Key Turn ON Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the MB switch on the line/trunk card is turned ON while extracting or inserting a circuit card or at PM initialization. 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 338 CHAPTER 3 System Messages 7-L: PM MB Key Turn OFF Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the MB switch on the line/trunk card is turned OFF while extracting or inserting a circuit card or at PM initialization. 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 339 CHAPTER 3 System Messages 7-M: NCU MB Key Turn ON Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the MB switch on the PFT card is turned ON while extracting or inserting a circuit card, or at PM initialization. 1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 340 CHAPTER 3 System Messages 7-N: NCU MB Key Turn OFF Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the MB switch on the PFT card is turned OFF while extracting or inserting a circuit card, or at PM initialization. 1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 341: O Cyclic Diagnosis Normal
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 7-O: Cyclic Diagnosis Normal Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified In a specific time cycle, the system allows a routine diagnosis in its hardware and software to determine if they are operating properly. This message indicates that the system has been checked by the routine diagnosis program and the result of the diagnosis is normal.
Page 342 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [00H] Routine Diagnosis Start 1: 00XX XXXX XXXX XX00 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Performed Diagnosis Item [00H] Routine Diagnosis Start Pending Diagnosis Menu (SYS1,...
Page 343 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Periodic Backup (INDEX 304) b0: 0/1 = -/Individual Speed Calling Data b1: 0/1 = -/Call Forwarding Data b6 b5 b4 b2: 0/1 = -/Remote Call Forwarding Data b3: 0/1 = -/Name Display Data b4: 0/1 = -/User Assign Soft Key Data b5: 0/1 = -/Number Sharing Data b6: 0/1 = -/Call Block Data Periodic Backup (INDEX 305)
Page 344 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [20H] Data Memory Verification Normal End 1: 20XX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Routine Diagnosis [20H] Data Memory Verification Normal End...
Page 345 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [30H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Normal End 1: 30XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Routine Diagnosis [30H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Normal End...
Page 346 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [40H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Normal End 1: 40XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Routine Diagnosis [40H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Normal End...
Page 347 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [50H] No Trunk Ineffective Hold 1: 50XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Routine Diagnosis [50H] No Trunk Ineffective Hold MG and Unit number of Trunk...
Page 348 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [51H] Accommodated Location of PS - No Trunk Ineffective Hold 1: 5100 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Routine Diagnosis [51H] Accommodated Location of PS - No Trunk Ineffective Hold...
Page 349 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [70H] Call Forwarding Memory Clear Normal End 1: 7000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Routine Diagnosis [70H] Call Forwarding Memory Clear Normal End...
Page 350 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [A0H] Periodic Back-up Normal 1: 10XX XXXX 0000 XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 00XX 3: 00XX 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Routine Diagnosis [A0H] Periodic Back-up Normal Information on Periodic Backup...
Page 351 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Backup Data to System 1 0/1 = -/Individual Speed Calling Data 0/1 = -/Call Forwarding Data 0/1 = -/Remote Call Forwarding Data File 0/1 = -/Name Display Data 0/1 = -/User Assign Soft Key Data b15 b14 b13 b12 0/1 = -/Number Sharing Data 0/1 = -/Call Block Data 0/1 = -/Call Forwarding-Logout Data...
Page 352 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [C0H] Detection of Remaining Link Normal End 1: C000 00XX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Performed Diagnosis Item [C0H] Detection of Remaining Link Normal End...
Page 353: P Cyclic Diagnosis Information (Error Detected)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 7-P: Cyclic Diagnosis Information (Error Detected) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified In a specific time cycle, the system allows a routine diagnosis in its hardware and software to determine if they are operating properly. This message indicates that the system has been checked by the routine diagnosis program and the result of the diagnosis is not normal.
Page 354 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Detected Error Item [20H] Data Memory Verification Discrepancy [21H] Data Memory Verification Impossible (Flash Card Fault) b6 b5 b4 [2FH] Data Memory Verification Stop [30H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure [31H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (MUX Fault) [3FH] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Stop [41H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (Single CPU System) [42H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (DM Verification NG)
Page 355 0/1 = -/Present Data Memory (DM) 0/1 = -/Local Data Memory (LDM) 0/1 = -/Network Data Memory (NDM) Verification of Office Data 0/1 = -/Verified against Drive1 0/1 = -/Verified against Drive2 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers – 308 –...
Page 356 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [21H] Data Memory Verification Impossible (Flash Card Fault) 1: 21XX XX00 XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 On the e above diagram, the output location of is different depending on which information to look...
Page 357 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers Error Drive 0/1 = -/Drive 0 (A) 0/1 = -/Drive 1 (B) 0/1 = -/Drive 2 (C) 0/1 = -/Drive 3 (D) When (Error Type) is 00H, Signal Code, Error Drive are valid.
Page 358 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [2FH] Data Memory Verification Stop 1: 2FXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Detected Error Item [2FH] Data Memory Verification Stop Suspended Item (refer to ASYD...
Page 359 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [30H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure 1: 30XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 10 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Detected Error Item [30H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure...
Page 360 CHAPTER 3 System Messages MUX card (STBY) linkage As shown in the following table, each bit represents the Unit number condition allocated for each MUX card in position. When “1” is set, the corresponding MUX card (status: STBY) has a functional failure or is not b6 b5 b4 mounted in the proper location.
Page 361 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [31H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (MUX Fault) 1: 31XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 10 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Detected Error Item [31H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (MUX Fault)
Page 362 CHAPTER 3 System Messages MUX card (STBY) linkage As shown in the following table, each bit represents the Unit number condition allocated for each MUX card in position. When “1” is set, the corresponding MUX card (status: STBY) has a functional failure or is not b6 b5 b4 mounted in the proper location.
Page 363 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [3FH] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Stop 1: 3FXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Detected Error Item [3FH] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover stopped Suspended Item (refer to ASYD...
Page 364 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Error detection by Routine [41H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure Diagnosis ACT system after changeover 0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1 0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers – 317 –...
Page 365 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Error detection by Routine [42H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure Diagnosis (DM or PM Verification NG) ACT system after changeover 0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1 0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers – 318 –...
Page 366 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Error detection by Routine [43H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (PCI Fault) Diagnosis ACT system after changeover 0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1 0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers – 319 –...
Page 367 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Error detection by Routine [44H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure Diagnosis Changeover NG or CPU RAM Copy NG) ACT system after changeover 0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1 0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers – 320 –...
Page 368 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Error detection by Routine [45H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure Diagnosis (EMA MB) ACT system after changeover 0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1 0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers – 321 –...
Page 369 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Error detection by Routine [46H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure Diagnosis (EMA FIFO) ACT system after changeover 0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1 0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers – 322 –...
Page 370 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Error detection by Routine [47H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure Diagnosis (GATE Failure) ACT system after changeover 0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1 0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers – 323 –...
Page 371 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Error detection by Routine [48H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure Diagnosis (CPU Abnormal State) ACT system after changeover 0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1 0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers – 324 –...
Page 372 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Error detection by Routine [49H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure Diagnosis (Transfer Error) ACT system after changeover 0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1 0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers – 325 –...
Page 373 Error detection by Routine [4AH] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure Diagnosis (No Answer Error from other processor when changeover is requested) ACT system after changeover 0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1 0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers – 326 –...
Page 374 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [4FH] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Stop 1: 4FXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Error detection by Routine [4FH] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Stop Diagnosis...
Page 375 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [50H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected 1: 50XX 00XX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Error detection by Routine [50H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected Diagnosis...
Page 376 CHAPTER 3 System Messages <Level> Level 0/1 = -/Ineffectively held – 329 –...
Page 377 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [51H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected and Released 1: 51XX 00XX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Error detection by Routine [51H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected and Released...
Page 378 CHAPTER 3 System Messages <Level> Level 0/1 = -/Ineffectively held – 331 –...
Page 379 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [52H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected Impossible 1: 5200 XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Error detection by Routine [52H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected Impossible...
Page 380 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [53H] Accommodated Location of PS - Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected 1: 5300 0000 XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XXXX XXXX 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Error detection by Routine [53H] Accommodated Location of PS - Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected...
Page 381 CHAPTER 3 System Messages LENS of Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected (MG, U) b0-b2: U (0-3) b6 b5 b4 b3-b7: MG (0-31) – 334 –...
Page 382 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [54H] Accommodated Location of PS - Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected and Released 1: 5400 0000 XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XXXX XXXX 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Error detection by Routine [54H] Accommodated Location of PS - Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected...
Page 383 CHAPTER 3 System Messages LENS of Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected (G, LV) b0-b2: LV (0-7) b6 b5 b4 b3-b7: G (0-24) LENS of Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected (MG, U) b6 b5 b4 b0-b2: U (0-3) b3-b7: MG (0-31) – 336 –...
Page 384 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Trunk Ineffective Hold Detection is stopped [5FH] 1: 5FXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 XXXX XXXX 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Error detection by Routine [5FH] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detection is stopped...
Page 385 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [70H] Call Forwarding Memory Clear NG 1: 7000 XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Error detection by Routine Diagnosis [70H] Call Forwarding Memory Clear NG...
Page 386 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [7FH] Call Forwarding Memory Clear Stop 1: 7FXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 XXXX XXXX 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Error detection by Routine [7FH] Call Forwarding Memory Clear is stopped...
Page 387 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [A0H] Periodic Backup Abnormal End 1: A0XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: 00XX 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Error detection by Routine [A0H] Periodic Backup Abnormal End Diagnosis...
Page 388 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Error Code of System 0 Flash Card 21H: 40H~47H: b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 53H: 57H: 59H~5BH: 80H~84H: A0H: Flash Card A2H~A6H: BDH: C0H: Failed installation 01H: Flash Card being used by another program 02H: Flash Card not equipped...
Page 389 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Error Code of System 1 Flash Card 21H: 40H~47H: b6 b5 b4 53H: 57H: 59H~5BH: 80H~84H: A0H: Flash Card A2H~A6H: BDH: C0H: Failed installation 01H: Flash Card being used by another program 02H: Flash Card not equipped Error Status of System 1 Flash Card Error occurs;...
Page 390 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [AFH] Periodic Backup Stop 1: AFXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Error detection by Routine [AFH] Periodic Backup Stop Diagnosis...
Page 391 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [C0H] Detection of Remaining Link Abnormal End 1: C000 XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Performed Diagnosis Item [C0H] Detection of Remaining Link Abnormal End...
Page 392 CHAPTER 3 System Messages 7-Q: PFT Key ON Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified is set to ON (upward). This message displays when PFT key (2 in SW00 on EMA card) This message is available since S1E. Note: 1: 0000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 393 CHAPTER 3 System Messages 7-R: PFT Key OFF Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified is set to OFF (downward). This message displays when PFT key (2 in SW00 on EMA card) This message is available since S1E. Note: 1: 0000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 394 CHAPTER 3 System Messages 7-U: PLO MB Key Turn ON Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the MB switch on the PLO card is turned on while extracting or inserting a circuit card 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Faulty PLO card number...
Page 395 CHAPTER 3 System Messages 7-V: PLO MB Key Turn OFF Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the MB switch on the PLO card is turned off while extracting or inserting a circuit card 1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Faulty PLO card number...
Page 396: A Activation Code Request Notice (Sup)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 10-A: Activation Code Request Notice (SUP) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when Activation Code has not been registered for more than 29 days and less than 45 days 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Passed days from startup [30-44 days] (Displayed in HEX)
Page 397: B Activation Code Request Notice (Mn)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 10-B: Activation Code Request Notice (MN) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when Activation Code has not been registered for more than 44 days and less than 60 days 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Passed days from startup [45-59 days] (Displayed in HEX)
Page 398: C Activation Code Request Notice (Mj)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 10-C: Activation Code Request Notice (MJ) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when Activation Code has not been registered for 60 days or more 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Passed days from startup [maximum 127 days] (Displayed in HEX)
Page 399: D Ip License Excess Notice (Sup)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 10-D: IP License Excess Notice (SUP) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message is displayed if the number of IP terminals exceeds the number of registered IP Licenses. One message can display the information of 13 ports that encountered IP address acquisition NG. 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 6: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 7: XXXX XXXX XXXX 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 400: E Cpu Operation Mode Error Notification
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Kind of Notification 01 (Hex) = IP QUE Initialization Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers – 353 –...
Page 401: F Connection Failure Between Telephony Server And Sr-Mgc
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 10-F: Connection Failure between Telephony Server and SR-MGC Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when connection failure is detected between Telephony Server and Survivable Remote MGC (SR-MGC) 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XX00 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Function...
Page 402 CHAPTER 3 System Messages When =01 (Health Check Failure) SR-MGC Number b6 b5 b4 SR-MGC IP Address b6 b5 b4 Destination Port Number b6 b5 b4 – 355 –...
Page 403 CHAPTER 3 System Messages When =02 (Office Data Copy Failure) SR-MGC Number b6 b5 b4 Error detail 01 (Hex): Detected Health Check NG in MGC side 02 (Hex): HFC Check NG b6 b5 b4 03 (Hex): Copy NG to C Drive 04 (Hex): File Collation NG 05 (Hex): SR-MGC Data Save NG 06 (Hex): Copy NG from C Drive to B Drive...
Page 404 CHAPTER 3 System Messages When =03 (SP Failure) SP Failure Detection Mode 00 (Hex): SP Failure Detection of All SP-PHx b6 b5 b4 When =81 (Health Check Failure Detection) Trouble detection type 00 (Hex): - 01 (Hex): Health Check Packet reception time-out b6 b5 b4 02 (Hex): ping failure 03 (Hex): Health Check Sending and receiving completion Packet reception...
Page 405: G Connection Recovery Between Telephony Server And Sr-Mgc
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 10-G: Connection Recovery between Telephony Server and SR-MGC Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the communication between Telephony Server and Survivable Remote MGC (SR- recovers. MGC) 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XX00 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Kind of Recovered Failure...
Page 406 CHAPTER 3 System Messages When =01 (Health Check Communication Recovered) Detected SR-MGC Number SR-MGC Number (0 ~ 255) b6 b5 b4 IP Address of Fault detected SR-MGC IP address in the form of “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” (xxx = 0 ~ 255 HEX.) b6 b5 b4 Destination Port Number Port Number = 0, 1024 ~ 65534...
Page 407 CHAPTER 3 System Messages When =81 [Health Check Communication Failure Detection (SR-MGC)] Failure Recovery Detection Type b0-6: 01H = Health Check Packet Receiving OK b6 b5 b4 02H = Ping OK 03H = Health Check Send/Receive Complete Packet Receiving OK 0/1 = Health Check Recovery Detection after SR-MGC startup/ Health Check Recovery Detection after a failure is detected IP Address of MGC...
Page 408: H Illegal Software Version Information Set
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 10-H: Illegal Software Version Information Set Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message is issued when the software version assigned to NDM is later than the software version that has been actually installed to this node. If this message is issued, the software version that is assigned to NDM is not correct.
Page 409 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Software Version Actually Installed b0-b31: Information about Software Version Actually Installed to the Node to the Node b19 b18 b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24 – 362 –...
Page 410: I Software Version Information Report
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 10-I: Software Version Information Report Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message is issued when the particular program version information remains assigned to NDM for 3 to 7 The system checks the NDM at 0:00 a.m. every day. days.
Page 411 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Software Version Actually Installed b0-b31: Information about Software Version Actually Installed to the Node to the Node b19 b18 b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24 – 364 –...
Page 412: J Software Version Information Report
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 10-J: Software Version Information Report Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message is issued when the particular program version information remains assigned to NDM for 8 to 14 days. The system checks the NDM at 0:00 a.m. every day. 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XX00 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 413 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Software Version Actually Installed b0-b31: Information about Software Version Actually Installed to the Node to the Node b19 b18 b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24 – 366 –...
Page 414: K Software Version Information Report
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 10-K: Software Version Information Report Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message is issued when the particular program version information remains assigned to NDM for 15 or The system checks the NDM at 0:00 a.m. every day. more days.
Page 415 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Actually Installed Software Version b0-b31: Information about Software Version Actually Installed to the Node to the Node b19 b18 b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24 – 368 –...
Page 416: L Sr-Mgc State Notification
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 10-L: SR-MGC State Notification Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified Stand-by Mode. This message displays when the state of SR-MGC is changed to Operating Mode or 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XX00 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 SR-MGC State Change Notification...
Page 417 CHAPTER 3 System Messages When =01 (Change to Stand-by Mode) Kind of State Change 01H = Change of the state on startup b6 b5 b4 02H = Change of the state by network recovery detection 03H = Change of the state by CMNT command –...
Page 418: A Cch Clock Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 13-A: CCH Clock Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a clock down failure occurs in the CCH/DCH circuit card. When this message is indicated, the related CCH/DCH card is placed into make-busy status 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 419: B Cch C-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Permanent)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 13-B: CCH C-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Permanent) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when C-Level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor (PM) in the CCH/DCH circuit card has occurred 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Location of faulty CCH/DCH card...
Page 420: C Cch C-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Temporary)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 13-C: CCH C-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Temporary) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when C-Level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor (PM) in the CCH/DCH circuit card has occurred 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Location of faulty CCH/DCH card...
Page 421: D Cch Lock-Up Failure (Permanent)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 13-D: CCH Lock-Up Failure (Permanent) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a Port Microprocessor (PM) of the CCH/DCH card did not send an answer to the 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Location of faulty CCH/DCH card...
Page 422: E Cch Lock-Up Failure (Temporary)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 13-E: CCH Lock-Up Failure (Temporary) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a Port Microprocessor (PM) of the CCH/DCH card did not send an answer to the 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Location of faulty CCH/DCH card...
Page 423: F Cch B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Permanent)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 13-F: CCH B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Permanent) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when B-Level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor (PM) in the CCH/DCH circuit card has occurred 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Location of faulty CCH/DCH card...
Page 424: G Cch B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Temporary)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 13-G: CCH B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Temporary) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when B-Level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor (PM) in the CCH/DCH circuit card has occurred 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Location of faulty CCH/DCH card...
Page 425: H Ccs Link Failure (Permanent)
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Location of faulty CCH/DCH card b0-b4: Group number b5, b6: Unit (0-3) b6 b5 b4 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers – 378 –...
Page 426 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Probable cause for failure b0-b3: See the table below. CCITT FLT ID FACTOR ERROR S (F = 1) frame is received. DM (F = 1) response is received. UA (F = 1) response is received. UA (F = 0) response is received. DM (F = 0) response is received.
Page 427: I Ccs Link Failure (Temporary)
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Location of faulty CCH/DCH card b0-b4: Group number b5, b6: Unit (0-3) b6 b5 b4 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers – 380 –...
Page 428 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Probable cause for the failure b0-b3: See the table below. CCITT FLT ID FACTOR ERROR S (F = 1) frame is received. DM (F = 1) response is received. UA (F = 1) response is received. UA (F = 0) response is received.
Page 429: J Restoration From Ccs Link Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 13-J: Restoration From CCS Link Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the faults pertaining to CCIS/ISDN Link are restored to normal 1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Location of faulty CCH/DCH card...
Page 430: K Cch Reset Interrupt Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 13-K: CCH Reset Interrupt Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a fault occurred to the Port Microprocessor (PM) within the CCH/DCH circuit card and the restart processing is executed 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 431: N Digital Line Warning
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 13-N: Digital Line Warning Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a digital line failure occurs 1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Accommodated location...
Page 432: O Digital Line Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 13-O: Digital Line Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a digital line failure occurs 1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Accommodated location...
Page 433: P Digital Line Restore
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 13-P: Digital Line Restore Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a digital line failure is restored to normal 1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Accommodated location...
Page 434: Q Dru Battery Operation
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 13-Q: DRU Battery Operation Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the battery is operated in the DRU system 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Accommodated location...
Page 435: R Dru Line Operation
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 13-R: DRU Line Operation Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the main power of the DRU system is restored to normal 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Accommodated location...
Page 436: Z Power Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 13-Z: Power Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a PWR circuit card failure is detected 1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 ¬...
Page 437: A Vps Failure (Temporary)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 15-A: VPS Failure (Temporary) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a VPS failure is detected 1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Probable cause for failure...
Page 438: B Vps Failure (Permanent)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 15-B: VPS Failure (Permanent) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a VPS failure is detected 1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Probable cause for failure...
Page 439: C Vps Restore
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 15-C: VPS Restore Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a VPS failure is restored to normal 1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 LENS of VPS with the failure...
Page 440: A Inside Trunk All Busy
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 16-A: Inside Trunk All Busy Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when Intra-Office Trunks (ATI, RST, etc.) have all become busy. 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Intra-Office trunks that have...
Page 441 CHAPTER 3 System Messages ROUTE DATA ROUTE DATA TRUNK NAME TRUNK NAME (HEX) (HEX) Attendant Console MFC Sender Originating Register Trunk Not used Incoming Register Trunk MODEM MF Receiver MODEM Sender Trunk DP/PB MODEM PB Receiver for Automated MODEM Attendant Service MODEM Not used MODEM...
Page 442: B Virtual Tie Line Set Report
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 16-B: Virtual Tie Line Set Report Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when virtual tie line setup has completed. 1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Counter...
Page 443: C Virtual Tie Line Cancel Report
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 16-C: Virtual Tie Line Cancel Report Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when virtual TIE line cancel has completed. 1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Counter...
Page 444: E Virtual Tie Line Set Time Out
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 16-E: Virtual Tie Line Set Time Out Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when virtual TIE line setup has failed due to a fault in the network of the terminating office concerned. 1: 00XX XX8X XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 445 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Virtual TIE line call header b3-b7: Call Source accommodated location DATA CALL SOURCE b6 b5 b4 User Private network to which the user is directly connected. (self side) National network to which the user is directly connected. (self side) TIE line network National network to which the opposite party is directly...
Page 446 CHAPTER 3 System Messages REASON CLASS KIND DATA REASON KIND VALUE 0010 No usable channel/line 0110 Network failure 1001 Temporary failure 010 xxxx 1010 Switching system congested Classes not allowed use of resources 1011 Access information discarded 1100 Use of requested line/channel not allowed 1111 Class not allowed use of other resources Reason Kind...
Page 447: F Sender Start Time Out
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 16-F: Sender Start Time Out Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message indicates that an outgoing call (by connection acknowledge system) has not received an acknowledgment signal from the opposite office. As a result, the attempted outgoing call is routed to Reorder Tone (ROT) connection.
Page 448 CHAPTER 3 System Messages OPTN data b0-b3: OPTN data Note Note: This data displays when the Tenant number of the calling station is larger than 15, and b7 of displays as “1” (otherwise, “0” displays at any time). While the four-bit data of is self-sufficient in verifying Tenant 1-15, this OPTN data provides a supportive role to cover Tenant number ranging from 16 to 255.
Page 449 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Trunk number of OG trunk b0-b7: Trunk number of OG trunk b6 b5 b4 b6 b5 b4 Trunk number of OG sender b0-b7: Trunk number of sender b6 b5 b4 b6 b5 b4 Number of digits dialed by caller b0-b4: Number of digits dialed by caller b6 b5 b4...
Page 450 CHAPTER 3 System Messages In Case of Tandem Connection Type of connection 0 = Tandem connection IC route number (HEX) AC data 0/1=Internal trunk/External trunk b6 b5 b4 OP data (0/1) When OPRT data of is valid, “1” displays. b0-b5: IC route number •...
Page 451 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Not used OG route number (HEX) AC data 0/1=Internal trunk/External trunk b6 b5 b4 OP data (0/1) When OPRT data of is valid, “1” displays, b0-b5: OG route number • b6=0 Route number<64 Refer to the OPTN •...
Page 452 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Trunk number of sender b0-b7: Trunk number of sender b6 b5 b4 b6 b5 b4 Number of digits dialed by caller b0-b4: Number of digits dialed by caller Number dialed by caller (See table) b6 b5 b4 b4-b7 b0-b3 DC10...
Page 453: M Hard Clock Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 16-M: Hard Clock Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the timer circuit in the system becomes faulty and stops functioning and a 64 Hz clock alarm is output. 1: 0000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Message Detail Data...
Page 454: N Hard Clock Restore
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 16-N: Hard Clock Restore Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when [16-M] 64 Hz Clock Down Detected is restored to normal. 1: 0000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Message Detail Data...
Page 455: A Cch Mbr Key Turn On
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 17-A: CCH MBR Key Turn ON Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the MBR switch on the CCH/DCH card is turned ON. 1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Location of CCH/DCH card...
Page 456: B Cch Mbr Key Turn Off
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 17-B: CCH MBR Key Turn OFF Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the MBR switch on the CCH/DCH card is turned OFF. 1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Location of CCH/DCH card...
Page 457 CHAPTER 3 System Messages 17-C: CCH MB Key Turn ON Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the MB switch on the CCH/DCH card is turned ON while extracting or inserting a circuit card or at PM initialization, etc. 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 458: D Cch Mb Key Turn Off
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 17-D: CCH MB Key Turn OFF Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the MB switch on the CCH/DCH card is turned OFF while extracting or inserting a circuit card or at PM initialization, etc. 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 459: H Day/Night Change Information
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 17-H: Day/Night Change Information Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the NIGHT switch on the ATTCON/DESKCON is operated or when the DAY/ NIGHT change is executed by the external switch operation. 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Note 1 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 460 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Day/Night Mode Specification b0-b3: Mode after changing b4-b7: Mode before changing b6 b5 b4 b0 b1 b2 b3 MEANING b4 b5 b6 b7 Day Mode Night Mode 1 Night Mode 2 available only for Japan Night Mode 3 (DIT-Night Connection Fixed) Note This data is programmed as initial data.
Page 461 CHAPTER 3 System Messages 17-O: IOC MB Key Turn ON Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message is displayed when IOC card is removed from the module while the MBR is set to OFF. 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Circuit Card number...
Page 462: P Ioc Mb Key Turn Off
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 17-P: IOC MB Key Turn OFF Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message is displayed when IOC card is inserted into the module while the MBR is set to OFF. 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Circuit Card number...
Page 463: Q Ioc Mbr Key Turn On
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 17-Q: IOC MBR Key Turn ON Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message is displayed when the MBR switch on the IOC card is turned ON. 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Circuit Card number...
Page 464: R Ioc Mbr Key Turn Off
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 17-R: IOC MBR Key Turn OFF Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displayed when the MBR switch on the IOC card is turned OFF. 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Circuit Card number...
Page 465: P Dch Back-Up Automatic Change Start/End
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 23-P: DCH Back-Up Automatic Change Start/End Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the Primary Dch fails, and the Dch Back-Up function is operated automatically. 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Condition of Dch...
Page 466 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Changeover Information b0, b1: 00 = Change from Primary Dch to Dch for Back-up 01 = Change from Dch for Back-up to Primary Dch 10 = Place Primary Dch to ACT status 11 = Place Dch for Back-up to ACT status b2, b3: 00 = Change signal is received 01 = Change signal is sent...
Page 467: Q Dch Back-Up Manual Change Start/End
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 23-Q: DCH Back-Up Manual Change Start/End Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the Primary Dch fails, and the Dch Back-Up function is operated manually. 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Condition of Dch...
Page 468 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Detailed information on changing b0, b1: 00 = Change from Primary Dch to Dch for Back-up 01 = Change from the Dch for Back-up to Primary Dch 10 = Place Primary Dch to ACT status 11 = Place Dch for Back-up to ACT status b2, b3: Way of changing 00 = Changed by the MAT 01 = Changed by the MB switch of the circuit card...
Page 469: Y Mux Clock Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 23-Y: MUX Clock Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the MUX card has a clock failure in one of the dual systems. 1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Unit, MG, system number for MUX...
Page 470: Z Both Mux Clock Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 23-Z: Both MUX Clock Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the MUX card has a clock failure in both of the dual systems. 1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 MUX card location...
Page 471: N Mat Log
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 26-N: MAT Log Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the PCPro is log-in or log-out. 1: XX00 XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Port number of the PCPro logged...
Page 472: R Call Trace
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 26-R: Call Trace Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message is issued when a call, originated via a station/trunk, is judged as malicious, and then, the details on the call are traced with the called party pressing an access code or the Call Trace key. When a call is originated from a station 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 473 CHAPTER 3 System Messages • Information on Malicious call Kind of Call (HEX) 10H=Call from a station b4 - b7 b0 - b3 Fusion Point Code (FPC) (HEX) Note 1 Note 3 b4 - b7 b0 - b3 Tenant number (HEX) Note 1 Note 3 b4 - b7...
Page 474 CHAPTER 3 System Messages When a call is originated from a trunk 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 •...
Page 475 CHAPTER 3 System Messages • Information on Malicious Call Kind of Call (HEX) 20H=Call from a trunk b4 - b7 b0 - b3 Calling number of Trunk Call (Caller ID) (HEX) Note 1, Note 2 DC10 DC11 DC12 DC13 DC14 DC15 Each number/code is output in hexadecimal.
Page 476: V Lan Interface Error Report
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 26-V: LAN Interface Error Report Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message is issued when the connection error related to external LAN Interface equipment occurs in the system. Application Part TCP/IP Part 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX 00XX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 12 13 14 15 16 17...
Page 477 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Table 3-1 Error Code OUTPUT DATA DEFINITION (HEX (DEC)) Not operational 01 (01) User parameter error 16 (22) Operation already in progress 25 (37) Cannot assign requested address 31 (49) Network is down 32 (50) Buffer space error 37 (55) No route for requested host 41 (65)
Page 478 (HEX) b0-b7: When 01/02/06/08/0A/0B is output at , MAT input 11 10 information is displayed. Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers When =03 (SMDR) / 04 (MCI) b0-b7: (HEX) Device Number of error-detected Client PC Device Number of error-detected Client PC.
Page 479 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Details on Detected Error -When 01/02 is output at 11 10 b0-b7: Cause of error (HEX) -When 05 is output at 11 10 b0-b7: 01=Data (Data Output via LAN) not assigned 02=Device number not assigned -When 07 is output at b0-b7: 00=No Parity is set 01=Odd Parity is set...
Page 480 CHAPTER 3 System Messages When =06 (PMS) Device Number of error-detected PC (HEX) b0-b7: Device Number of error-detected Client PC. If the Machine is not determined, FF is output. b6 b5 b4 Error Kind (ERRK) b0-b7: Error Kind (HEX) 01: SEND Execution error b6 b5 b4 02: RECEIVE Execution error 05: System Data is not assigned...
Page 481 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Details on Detected Error -When 01/02 is output at 11 10 b0-b7: Cause of error (HEX) -When 05 is output at 11 10 b0-b7: 01=Data (Data Output via LAN) not assigned 02=Device number not assigned -When 07 is output at b0-b7: 00=No Parity is set 01=Odd Parity is set...
Page 482: W Lan Interface Release Report
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 26-W: LAN Interface Release Report Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the LAN Interface Connection Failure, detected in System Message [26-V], recovers. The message displays when the LAN Interface Connection Failure is restored. The first data is normally sent/received by the recovered application equipment.
Page 483 CHAPTER 3 System Messages When =03 (SMDR) / 04 (MCI) b0-b7: (HEX) Device number of recovered Client PC Device number of recovered Client PC for external LAN Interface. b0-b7: (HEX) Recovery Information 01=Recovered 02~FF=Not defined When =06 (PMS) Device number of recovered Client PC b0-b7: (HEX) Device number of recovered Client PC.
Page 484: A Mux Clock Restore
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 33-A: MUX Clock Restore Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the MUX card, whose clock function was detected as faulty, is recovered. 1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Unit, MG number for MUX card,...
Page 485: B Sdt Alarm Warning
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 33-B: SDT Alarm Warning Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when an abnormal state is detected temporarily on the SDT (PA-SDTA/B) card. 1: X0XX 00XX XXXX XX00 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Module Group (MG)
Page 486 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Alarm-detected HW The data here specifies the HW, on which any of the VC-11 Path Trouble was detected in data . Note. b6 b5 b4 Refer to the table below: 0/1=-/VC-11 Path Trouble This data displays only when b4 is “1” and b3 is “0” in data Note: Repair Procedure Fault repair work is not required by the display of this message.
Page 487: C Sdt Alarm Trouble
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 33-C: SDT Alarm Trouble Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when a grave failure occurs on the SDT (PA-SDTA/B) card. If this is issued, remember the ACT/STBY change of the SDT card may be followed, as a result of fault detection in the optical fiber line (see System Message [33-E]).
Page 488 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Repair Procedure Depending on the fault status shown in data , perform necessary repair work: (1) Hardware Failure/Onboard Power Alarm SDT (PA-SDTA/B) card is faulty. Replace the card with a spare by referring to Chapter 5: Replacement Procedure of SDT Card and Optical Fiber Cable.
Page 489 CHAPTER 3 System Messages (6) Receiving Path Failure/Receiving Path Error Abnormal state is detected in the process of multiplexing the Receive signals. To restore this, perform the following: STEP 1 Initialization of SDT card (distant node) Initialize the SDT card in the distant node, and observe the situation. If the fault is not restored, proceed with STEP 2.
Page 490: D Sdt Alarm Restore
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 33-D: SDT Alarm Restore Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the SDT (PA-SDTA/B) card or optical fiber line, that was once detected as faulty, recovers. 1: X0XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Module Group (MG)
Page 491: E Sdt Interface Change Notify
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 33-E: SDT Interface Change Notify Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the ACT/STBY of the SDT (PA-SDTA) card is changed over as a result of fault detection in the optical fiber line. When the ACT/STBY change cannot be performed, this message also indicates the cause for the changeover execution failure.
Page 492: F Pkg Download Failure Notification
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 33-F: PKG Download Failure Notification Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message is shown when failure in downloading from the system to the card, or from the card to the terminal, is detected. 1: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 493 CHAPTER 3 System Messages When is 02H (Menu download failure b0-b15: Mounting location of terminal which detected fault between ELCN-PKG and terminal) b0-b2: Level No. b3-b7: Group No. b8-b9: Unit No. b10-b14: MG No. b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b15: Not used Details of Fault...
Page 494: G Mux Pkg Pcm Parity Error Report
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 33-G: MUX PKG PCM Parity Error Report Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when PCM parity error occurs on MUX circuit card. 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 MUX in which a fault occurs...
Page 495: H Mux Pkg Pcm Parity Error Recovery Report
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 33-H: MUX PKG PCM Parity Error Recovery Report Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when PCM parity error on MUX circuit card has been recovered. 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 MUX in which a fault occurs...
Page 496: R Ip Pkg Warning
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 33-R: IP PKG Warning Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message is issued as a warning for the IP-related network configuration (IPTRK/PHC/PHL/IP PAD), such as heavy load imposed on the IP network. 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 11 12 9 10 13 14...
Page 497 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Fault Information (INF) When = 01 or 02 Hex.: 01H: Hardware Error b6 b5 b4 02H: Ether Error 03H: IP Error 04H: TCP Error When = 03 Hex.: 01H: RTP/RTCP Error When = 04 Hex.: 01H: Hardware Error (Removal of Ether Cables, Initialization Fault, etc.) 02H: Ether Error (Fault related to Ether Drivers) 03H: IP Error (Warning related to IP Packets)
Page 498 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Additional Information the data. These data vary depending on the combination of See the tables on the following pages: b6 b5 b4 – 451 –...
Page 499 CHAPTER 3 System Messages The following provides the fault information by using the combination of data (FNC, INF, and FLT). Definition of Fault Information 6 28 INF ( FLT ( Data of Description 01/02 None Ether cable not connected Failed to initialize Ether Controller Failed to reset Ether Controller Failed after 16 attempts to transmit, due to collisions...
Page 500 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Definition of Fault Information 6 28 INF ( FLT ( Data of Description No response to keep alive : Port Kind packet 01: For FCCS Signaling 02: For Speech Path Control Level 4 error 03: For CCIS Signaling : Connection Type Time out disconnection 01: Client...
Page 501 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Definition of Fault Information 6 28 INF ( FLT ( Data of Description : Faulty Voice Channel Lost packets a lot : CODEC (H Over jitter-interval When IP PAD is installed, “H ” is not used, Jitter buffer overflow -) are different from and some bytes (...
Page 502 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Definition of Fault Information 6 28 INF ( FLT ( Data of Description : Function Code Receive Buffer Error 00: Warning Fixed 01: Fault 02: Recovery Fixed 9 28 : Dynamic Data Fixed For more information, see Note: Communication restart from PM to “Detailed...
Page 503 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Definition of Fault Information 6 28 INF ( FLT ( Data of Description Failed to send IP related data setting : Sequence Number command : PM Type Note 1 Failed to receive IP related data : PM Extension Type Note 1 setting command : Contents of Command Response timeout of IP related data...
Page 504 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Definition of Fault Information 6 28 INF ( FLT ( Data of Description Response timeout of VLAN/EN : Sequence Number deletion command : PM Type Note 1 Command for PH restart with initial : PM Extension Type Note 1 settings: 01h output : Contents of Command Command for PH restart with initial...
Page 505 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Definition of Fault Information 6 28 INF ( FLT ( Data of Description Failed to perform health check : Error Number The system automatically Note: : PM Type Note 1 resets the appropriate ter- : PM Extension Type Note 1 minal for the recovery pur- : MAC Address (Max.8 addresses) pose.
Page 506 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Definition of Fault Information 6 28 INF ( FLT ( Data of Description : Port Kind Failed to receive keep-alive packets 01: H.245 Disconnected connection due to 02: Signaling (MG and IP terminal) timeout 03: Speech Channel Control : Connection Type 00: Client 01: Server...
Page 507 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Definition of Fault Information 6 28 INF ( FLT ( Data of Description MG fault is determined because a 6 26 : Detailed Fault Information several faults in PM of PHI in each Telephony Server occur for a period. SH4 (NC) temporary fault SH1 (TC) temporary fault SH1 (VC) temporary fault...
Page 508 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Definition of Fault Information 6 28 INF ( FLT ( Data of Description PHF operation start Recovered from the network fault Not Applicable Recovered by re-routing Socket option error FCCS port fault Initialize PHF module UDP packet sending error Communication failure (major) Peer-to-Peer FCCS network has been disconnected because of fre-...
Page 509 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Combination of shows the following Circuit Cards. Note 1: Circuit Card (PM Type) (PM Extension Type) PHA (4 card-width occupied) PHA (2 card-width occupied) PHD (4 card-width occupied) PHD (2 card-width occupied) IP PAD PHE (4 card-width occupied) PHE (2 card-width occupied) Internal PHE (2 card-width occupied) Internal PHI...
Page 510 MC, MG, or PHA/PHE) is abnormal. Make sure that the MC/MG with the MAC address shown on the message is available to use. If it is listed as available, keep watching it. Otherwise, contact NEC engineers. Specify the cause location of the fault as follows:...
Page 511 Make sure that the MG with the MAC address shown on the message is available to use. If it is listed as available, keep watching it. Otherwise, contact NEC engineers. If this message is frequently output, review the network and make sure the LAN configuration, or ask maintenance personnel.
Page 512 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Table 3-2 Troubleshooting For Fault Information FNC( ) INF( ) FLT( ) SOLUTION : Cause of socket option setting error (Error number notified by the TCP/IP module) 10 13 : Socket number with error (Socket number will be indicated as “0” when failed to generate the socket number) : Cause of error cause: 01 (Socket generating error) : 02 (Bind error)
Page 513 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Table 3-2 Troubleshooting For Fault Information FNC( ) INF( ) FLT( ) SOLUTION : Destination FPC number : Cause of start 1/2 = Send process/Receive process - : Send/Received packet ID when phenomenon occurred 10 11 - : ID of packet estimated to be received when phenomenon occurred (Only when Cause of start = “2”) : Destination FPC number...
Page 514 CHAPTER 3 System Messages The following provides detailed fault information and the solution by using the combination of data (INF, FLT, and Detailed Info). These information are provided when FNC ( ) indicates 04. Table 3-3 Detailed Fault Information and The Troubleshooting Detailed Info INF ( ) FLT ( )
Page 515 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Table 3-3 Detailed Fault Information and The Troubleshooting (continued) Detailed Info INF ( ) FLT ( ) Description Solution (1) When the fault occurs in all the terminals accommodated in IPELC (IPLC), reset the IPELC (IPLC). If the fault occurs again, replace the IPELC (IPLC) with a new one.
Page 516: S Ip Pkg Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 33-S: IP PKG Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message is issued when the system detects a failure on the IPTRK/PHC/PHL/IP PAD circuit cards that affects normal speech path state. 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 11 12 9 10 13 14...
Page 517 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Fault Information When = 01 or 02 Hex.: 01H: Hardware Error b6 b5 b4 02H: Ether Error 03H: IP Error 04H: TCP Error When = 03 Hex.: 01H: RTP/RTCP Error When = 04 Hex.: 01H: Hardware Error (Removal of Ether Cables, Initialization Fault, etc.) 02H: Ether Error (Fault related to Ether Drivers) 03H: IP Error (Warning related to IP Packets)
Page 518: T Ip Pkg Restore
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 33-T: IP PKG Restore Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message is issued when IPTRK/PHC/PHL/IP PAD circuit cards’ failure recovers. 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 9 10 11 12 13 14...
Page 519 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Fault Information When = 01 or 02 Hex.: 01H:Hardware Error b6 b5 b4 02H:Ether Error 03H:IP Error 04H:TCP Error When = 03 Hex.: 01H:RTP/RTCP Error When = 04 Hex.: IP related fault occurs in LAN 01H=Hardware Error 02H=Ether Error 03H=IP Error 04H=RTP/RTCP Warning...
Page 520: U H.323 Information
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 33-U: H.323 Information Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message is issued when the system detects any H.323-related information. 1: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Accommodated location of circuit...
Page 521 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Fault Information This data can be analyzed by combination b6 b5 b4 See the table below: Definition of Fault Information - Details DATA OF DATA OF DEFINITION (HEX) (HEX) Received RCF message Received RRJ message Received UCF message Received URJ message Finished to register RTP/RTCP Failed to register RTP/RTCP...
Page 522: A Gk Operation Start Notification
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 35-A: GK Operation Start Notification Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when initial settings for Gate Keeper (GK) have successfully completed and the GK starts operating. 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 ID of GK that starts operating...
Page 523 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Number Speech Channels b0-b15:The number of speech channels between Telephony Server and GK Between Telephony Server and GK (1-300) (HEX) ( Little Indian Note) b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 Format for storage or transmission of binary data in which the least significant bit in the lowest address Note: comes first.
Page 524: B Gk Operation Stop Notification
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 35-B: GK Operation Stop Notification Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when Telephony Server failed to communicate with Gate Keeper (GK) via control signals during operations. 1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 ID of GK that stops operating...
Page 525: C Sp Warning Notification
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 35-C: SP Warning Notification Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when temporal failure occurs on SP. 1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Accommodated location of fault-...
Page 526: D Sp Failure
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 35-D: SP Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when any failure has influence on carrying on calls occur on SP. 1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Accommodated location of fault-...
Page 527: E Sp Failure Recovery
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 35-E: SP Failure Recovery Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when any failure has influence on carrying on calls recovered. 1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Accommodated location of fault-...
Page 528: F Sp Process Information
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 35-F: SP Process Information Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays the event information related to WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process. Note 1 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XX00 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Note 2: WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process controls the following terminals in SP.
Page 529 CHAPTER 3 System Messages IP address of WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process (IP) Note 2 IP address b0-b7: IP address b0-b7: IP address b0-b7: IP address b0-b7: IP address When FNC is 01H: IP address of SP whose operation is started. When FNC is 02H: IP address of SP to reset When FNC is 03H: IP address of SP that is active when is received.
Page 530 CHAPTER 3 System Messages • Terms for outputting System Message Each operation related to WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process and system message that is output when an event occurs is as follows. Several messages may be output for one event. Note: Terms for outputting System Message SIP Wireless Terminal Operation/Event...
Page 531 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Terms for outputting System Message SIP Wireless Terminal Operation/Event System Message Backup • 35-F (Information), FNC=02H (Reset Indica- tion from PCPro.), ST=02H (Active) • 35-G(Warning), FNC=02H (ACT Change.), Reset operation from PCPro (Active side) ST=02H (Active) •...
Page 532 CHAPTER 3 System Messages If WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process is restarted before TP side detects KeepAliveTimeOut, only Note: “35-F: FNC=01H (Service Start.)” is output without outputting “35-G: FNC=01H (Service Stop.)“, “35-I: FNC=01H (Service Stop.)” or “35-I: FNC=02H (SIP Wireless Terminal Backup Service Stop.)“ –...
Page 533: G Sp Process Warning
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 35-G: SP Process Warning Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays the warning information related to WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process. Note 1 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Refer to “35-F”...
Page 534 CHAPTER 3 System Messages IP address of WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process (IP) Note 2 IP address b0-b7: IP address b0-b7: IP address b0-b7: IP address b0-b7: IP address When FNC is 01H: IP address of SP whose operation is stopped. When FNC is 02H: IP address of SP that is changed active by changeover.
Page 535 CHAPTER 3 System Messages • Factors for outputting system message System message that disturbs WLAN Handset/Standard SIP terminal operation is indicated as follows. Factors for outputting system message System Message Outputting factors/Countermeasure FNC=01H (Service Stop.) (Normal outputting factor) Output only when •...
Page 536 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Factors for outputting system message System Message Outputting factors/Countermeasure FNC=03H (SIP Wireless Terminal Backup Service Config- (Abnormal outputting factor) uration Failure.) • When redundant SIP server ID is different be- Output only when Note: SIP Wireless Terminal tween the config data on SP side and the ASS- Backup is executed.
Page 537: I Sp Process Stop
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 35-I: SP Process Stop Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays the major failure information related to WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process. Note 1 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Refer to “35-F”...
Page 538 CHAPTER 3 System Messages IP address of WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process (IP) Note 2 IP address b0-b7: IP address b0-b7: IP address b0-b7: IP address b0-b7: IP address When FNC is 01H: IP address of SP whose operation is stopped. When FNC is 02H: IP address of SP that is stopped later than other SP of two SP executing SIP Wireless Terminal Backup.
Page 539 CHAPTER 3 System Messages • Factors for outputting system message System message that disturbs WLAN Handset/Standard SIP terminal operation is indicated as follows. Factors for outputting system message System Message Outputting factors/Countermeasure FNC=01H (Service Stop.) (Normal outputting factor) Output only when •...
Page 540: A Office Data Copy Status Notification
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 36-A: Office Data Copy Status Notification Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the Office Data transfer is completed or started. 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 6: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Detailed information...
Page 541 CHAPTER 3 System Messages [a] Broadcast Destination LP [System b0: PBI No.30 (No.0 CPU system on LP00) 0] (indicates in Logical PBI number) PBI No.38 b2: PBI No.40 (No.0 CPU system on LP08) b6 b5 b4 PBI No.48 b4: PBI No.50 (No.0 CPU system on LP16) PBI No.58 b6: PBI No.60 (No.0 CPU system on LP24) PBI No.68...
Page 542 CHAPTER 3 System Messages This bit is applied only for STBY CPU. Note: [e] Capacity of Broadcast Destination Data Memory (DM)/Network Data Memory (NDM) Kind of Office Data Copy:When the Office Data Copy is 10/20 indicates Data Memory (DM), when the Office Data Copy is 30/40 indicates Network Data Memory (NDM).
Page 543 CHAPTER 3 System Messages • When the Office Data Copy = 10/20 (Data Memory Capacity) Local Data Memory Capacity b0-b3: Data Memory Capacity (displays attributes specified by ASYDL/ASYDN SYS1 INDEX513) b6 b5 b4 01H: 2M 03H: 4M 07H: 6M 0FH: 8M Note 1 1FH: 10M 3FH: 12M...
Page 544 CHAPTER 3 System Messages : This data indicates 50 or 60. [a] Capacity of Broadcast Destination b0-7: NDM Capacity (displays attributes specified by ASYDL/ Network Data Memory (NDM) ASYDN SYS1 INDEX514) 01H: 2M b6 b5 b4 03H: 4M 07H: 6M 0FH: 8M 1FH: 10M 3FH: 12M...
Page 545 CHAPTER 3 System Messages When the Office Data Copy is finished or failed ( = 60) FPC numbers of destination office are displayed. b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Node No. 1 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Node No.
Page 546: E Registration Security Alert
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 36-E: Registration Security Alert Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when IP terminal user failed to enter the correct password when logging in. Note 1 1: XX00 XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 10 11 14 15 16 17...
Page 547 CHAPTER 3 System Messages b6 b5 b4 16 19 IP Address of when failed to LOGIN – 500 –...
Page 548: F Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 36-F: Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified [36-F] Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent) is output when the timeout of Fusion Health Check is detected. This message is of two types: Temporary and Permanent. The temporary failure message is displayed when the timeout of Fusion Health Check is detected.
Page 549 CHAPTER 3 System Messages 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 2: XX00 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Type of Message 01H= Fusion link temporary failure...
Page 550 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Accommodated Location of FCCH b0-b2: Level Number b3-b7: Group Number b8-b9: Unit Number b10-b15: Module Group Number (00=Health check between nodes without FCH) 00H=Health check between nodes without FCH 01H-FDH: FPC (1-253) b6 b5 b4 Destination FPC 00H=Health check to FCCH 01H-FDH: Destination FPC (1-253) b6 b5 b4...
Page 551: G Bandwidth Warning
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 36-G: Bandwidth Warning Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when used bandwidth exceeds the warning value defined between location IDs. Once this message is displayed, the message has not been output until its recovery. Output of this message can be controlled by using the office data settings (ABNDL).
Page 552 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Accommodated location of terminal b0-b31 = Accommodated Equipment Number of terminal that exceeded the warning value b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24 Accommodated location of terminal b0-b31: Accommodated Equipment Number of terminal that exceeded the warning value...
Page 553: H Bandwidth Warning Recovery
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 36-H: Bandwidth Warning Recovery Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when used bandwidth drops to below the warning value after the bandwidth warning. Output of this message can be controlled by using the office data settings (ABNDL). For more details refer to Office Data Specifications.
Page 554: I Bandwidth Fault
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 36-I: Bandwidth Fault Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the bandwidth restriction has been performed in the case of bandwidth resource shortage. Output of this message can be controlled by using the office data settings (ABNDL). For more details refer to Office Data Specifications.
Page 555 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Accommodated location of b0-b31 = Accommodated Equipment Number of Originated Terminal that originated terminal performed the bandwidth restriction b6 b5 b4 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24 Accommodated location of b0-b31 = Accommodated Equipment Number of Destination Terminal that...
Page 556: J Bandwidth Fault Recovery
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 36-J: Bandwidth Fault Recovery Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when reserving enough of the bandwidth resource [for two calls calculated by G711 (sending period 10ms)] after the bandwidth fault has terminated the bandwidth restriction. Output of this message can be controlled by using the office data settings (ABNDL).
Page 557: K Fusion Health Check Report (Recovery)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 36-K: Fusion Health Check Report (Recovery) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified [36-K] Fusion Health Check Report (Recovery) message is output when Fusion Health check succeeded after [36-F] Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent) or [36-T] Fusion Health Check Report (Permanent) is output.
Page 558 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Accommodated Location of FCH b0-b2: Level Number b3-b7: Group Number b8-b9: Unit Number b10-b15: Module Group Number (00=Health check between nodes without FCH) 00H=Health check between nodes without FCH 01H-FDH: FPC (1-253) b6 b5 b4 Destination FPC 00H=Health check to FCCH 01H-FDH: Destination FPC (1-253) b6 b5 b4...
Page 559: M Ip Terminal Auto Assignment Report
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 36-M: IP Terminal Auto Assignment Report Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays the result when IP terminal automatic assignment and deletion is executed. 1: XXXX XX00 XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 3: XXXX 0000 XXXX XX00 4: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 5: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Message Type...
Page 560 CHAPTER 3 System Messages LENS of IP Terminal (4 byte) b0-b7: MG = 00-07 b8-b15: Unit = 0-3 b16-b23: Group = 00-23 b24-b31: Level = 0-7 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24 IP Terminal Kind term...
Page 561 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Station Number (HEX) Note b4-b7 b0-b3 User Group Number (UGN) (HEX) Note b4-b7 b0-b3 b6 b5 b4 Telephone Number (TELN) (HEX) Note b4-b7 b0-b3 b4-b7 b0-b3 b6 b5 b4 DC11 DC10 DC13 DC12 DC15 DC14 Each Number/code is output in hexadecimal. Detailed meanings are as follows: Note: Output Data (HEX) Actual Meaning...
Page 562: N Ip Equipment Status Report
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 36-N: IP Equipment Status Report Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message is displayed fault logs for IP devices. 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 6: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 7: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Port Number of Terminal...
Page 563 CHAPTER 3 System Messages IP Address of Terminal b0-b31: IP Address (Big Endian) IP Address is indicated only for Sequence No = 1 of the Note: divided message. b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24 TAG1 01H=TAG1...
Page 564 CHAPTER 3 System Messages When = 01H (Reset Factor) is indicated 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX 01XX XX00 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 4: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Data Length b6 b5 b4...
Page 565 CHAPTER 3 System Messages 10 12 - Destination Reset Factor (Not used) b6 b5 b4 Reset Execution Time b0-b63: Reset Time Year-Month-Day-Hour-Minute-Seconds.Hundred Millisecond b0-b7: Year (YY1) b8-b15: Year (YY2) b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b16-b23: Month b24-b31: Day b32-b39: Hour b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b40-b47: Minute...
Page 566 CHAPTER 3 System Messages When = 02H ( ) is indicated Control Packet Send and Receive Information This is an example of the format for explanation. Actual start bit varies because it follows the undeter- Note: mined size of bits ( = 01H) explained in the previous page.
Page 567 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Number of Control Packets PROTIMS: indicates the number of retransmit PAW/PRW asking for ACK Retransmitted/Number of ACK (including retransmitted ones). Request Packets Transmitted/ DtermIP (SIP)/Soft Phone (SIP): indicates the number of request messages Number of Request Transmitted the terminal received from SP.
Page 568 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Number of Abnormal Sequence/ PROTIMS: indicates the total number of PAW/PRW received (including Number of PAWs/PRWs retransmission). received asking for ACK Reply/ DtermIP (SIP)/Soft Phone (SIP): indicates the number of 1st retransmission Number of Retransmission (once) (after 500 ms from the previous transmission).
Page 569 CHAPTER 3 System Messages When = 03H ( ) is indicated Registry NG Factor This is an example of the format for explanation. Actual start bit varies because it follows the undeter- Note: mined size of bits ( = 01H) explained in the previous page. 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX 03XX XX00 3: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 9 10 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 570: O System Message Overflow Notification
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 36-O: System Message Overflow Notification Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the number of stored system message gets to 512, the maximum storage capacity. The indication is fixed to all 0 in this system message. 1: 0000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000...
Page 571: T Fusion Health Check Report (Permanent)
CHAPTER 3 System Messages 36-T: Fusion Health Check Report (Permanent) Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified [36-T] Fusion Health Check Report message (Permanent) is output when the timeout of Fusion health check has been detected ten consecutive times after an output of temporary timeout of Fusion Health Check of [36-F] Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent).
Page 572 CHAPTER 3 System Messages 1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 2: XX00 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000 Type of Message 01H= Fusion link permanent failure...
Page 573 CHAPTER 3 System Messages Accommodated Location of FCCH b0-b2: Level Number b3-b7: Group Number b8-b9: Unit Number b10-b15: Module Group Number (00=Health check between nodes without FCH) 00H=Health check between nodes without FCH 01H-FDH: FPC (1-253) b6 b5 b4 Destination FPC 00H=Health check to FCCH 01H-FDH: Destination FPC (1-253) b6 b5 b4...
Page 574: Chapter 4 Fault Repair Procedures
CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures This chapter provides information on how to repair the fault(s) within the system. If any of the components or equipment listed in Table has a failure, move on to the repair procedure explained for each faulty condition. List of Fault Repair Procedures Fault status Reference...
Page 575: Ip Related Fault And Its Reason
CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures 1. IP RELATED FAULT AND ITS REASON Because of the system characteristic, there will be faults related to system side equipment and other faults (including the fault occurred on the network). Refer to system message and detailed data for the best treatment. In a certain condition, alarm may not be released or the failure may not be solved by the operation of procedure below.
Page 576: Tcp/Ip Link Fault
CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures 1.1 TCP/IP Link Fault (1) Diagnosis Because of the system characteristic, there will be faults related to system side equipment and other equip- ment faults (including the fault occurred on the network). Refer to system message and detailed data for the best treatment.
Page 577: Method Of Checking And Repairing Each Of "26-V"Errk
CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures 1.1.2 Method of Checking and Repairing Each of “26-V”ERRK Detailed description about the fault and its repair Method of check and repair ERRK All connection resource towards the corresponding TCP port is [1] Reconfirm if there is any released, because text sending failure has occurred continu- failure in UAP side TCP/IP ously on the communicating TCP port.
Page 578: Lan/Wan Communication Fault
CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures 1.2 LAN/WAN Communication Fault System administrator needs to find out the fault part, define it and repair it in prompt. Administrator needs to define the trouble part by localizing the trouble down to find out the trouble part when handling the net- work failure for the system, peripheral equipment or other network equipment (Routers, Switches, etc.).
Page 579 CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures Some of the error screens when ping command is used are shown below. • Routing trouble to the IP address Figure below shows that routing towards 192.168.2.10 is unavailable. Confirm the trouble part by us- ing the tracert command.
Page 580 CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures • Missed to solve the host name Figure below indicates miss to solve the host name with the IP address in the DNS searching when sending the packet. Confirm if there is any fault in name of the host or the DNS setting. C:\TEMP>ping pab160 Unknown host pab160.
Page 581 CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures [TRACERT]: Traces Route Towards Corresponding Point. TRACERT command is used to confirm the routing setting of the router on the network route when result of ping command had any kind of fault. Some router is set not to pass the ICMP command depending on the network environment. Note: Method: tracert IP address (ie: tracert 192.168.2.10) C:\TEMP>tracert 192.168.2.10...
Page 582 CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures [NETSTAT]: Command Used to Specify Network Status. NETSTAT command is used to specify the cause of the problem (network problem, host setting problem or the interface problem). This command can specify the log of the packet error, indicate packet transfer on port base and protocol base.
Page 583: Ip Related System Messages And The Reasons
CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures 1.3 IP Related System Messages and the Reasons This section explains the situation when system messages shown below appeared with relation to the IP. Because of the system characteristic, there will be faults related to system side equipment and other faults (including the fault occurred on the network).
Page 584: Ip Related System Message And Its Reason (33-R)
(b) If all operation is normal, accept it as an impulsive error and continue monitoring. When not activating normally, change the circuit card (in case of IPPAD). Contact NEC maintenance personnel when prob- lem is still not solved after performing this procedure.
Page 585 CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures About System Message “33-R” Outputted From Internal PHC (1) FNC=02H, INF=04H, FLT=04H (Exceed number of maximum connection) is outputted Fault reason • Connection is not available • Exceeding the maximum number of connection allowed <<Unable to originate or terminate any calls using PHC>> PHC office-to-office connection is operated with exceeding the maximum number of connections al- lowed.
Page 586: Ip Related System Message And Its Reason (33-S)
(b) If all operation is normal, the failure may be a temporary fault. Continue to monitor the system. When not activating normally, change the circuit card (in case of IPPAD). Contact NEC maintenance per- sonnel when problem is still not solved after performing this procedure.
Page 587 CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures About System Message “33-S” Outputted From Internal PHI (1) FNC=05H, INF=04H, FLT=02H (Command re-send error) is outputted. Fault reason • Communication is not available. <<This System Message will be output when control packet send timer timeout has occurred eight times continuously or when any communication fault was detected while sending the control packet.>>Fall out of the Ether cable or faulty cable between circuit card and HUB may be the reason.
Page 588: System Down Fault
CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures 1.4 System Down Fault System Down Fault Status Reference Fault Status Unable to define the fault reason When Cannot Define the Reason of Failure on page Faulty circuit card is displayed on the System When Circuit Card With Failure Is Indicated on System Message Message on page 541 Localizing the fault...
Page 589: Fault Repair/Localization Flow
CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures 1.4.3 Fault Repair/Localization Flow This section explains how to restore the system that is not operating normally due to fault. Follow the flow chart given below, which will show you the cause of the fault as well as countermeasures against it.
Page 590 CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures Figure 4-2 Flow Chart to Localize Faults (2/3) Fault Analysis Causes: Countermeasures ALM lamp on EMA card is steady ON? (abnormal behavior while running software) Office Data & Program Load Initial will automatically take place. Power Off and ON the system.
Page 591 CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures Figure 4-3 Flow Chart to Localize Faults (3/3) Fault Analysis Causes: Countermeasures Non-load Initial Restored? - Part of program starts running away because of reasons such as parity alarm: See (c). Office Data load Initial Restored? - Office data is abnormal because of reasons such as parity alarm: See (d).
Page 592 CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures (3) Countermeasures Against Faults (a) Available to operate normally after the system is placed in normal operation again. (b) When the system is restored by this replacement, the replaced parts was faulty. Prepare the spare card/ module/parts as required for future needs.
Page 593: Details Of Fault Repair/Localizing Flow
CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures 1.4.4 Details of Fault Repair/Localizing Flow (1) Check of Switch Setting and Lamps on the Front Panel Remove the front cover and confirm the switches and lamps on the front panel when fault occurred and operating the maintenance.
Page 594 CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures (a) ALM lamp (Red) indicates abnormal software behavior. (b) SYS ALM lamp indicates MJ alarm when it is steady ON. Also it indicates MN alarm when it is flash- ing in a certain interval. (c) Check the alarm status before starting fault repair procedure. If any change is detected, record it. (3) System Changeover (For Dual Configuration) SV8500 server has TP block and SP block.
Page 595 CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures • SP block (for SIP Station): Use CMOD command. TP and this block change over in combination. • SP block (for other than IP Station): load sharing (N + 1), both SPs are placed in ACT. The following operations require system shutdown.
Page 596: Clock Failure
CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures 1.5 Clock Failure The clock information can be obtained from an SNTP server that is specified in advance. If system message 16-M “Hard Clock Failure” is output, establish synchronization between the SV8500 and the SNTP server. Replace the system to alternative when the clock failure cannot be fixed.
Page 597 CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures This page is for your notes. – 550 –...
Page 598: Chapter 5 Operation Procedure For System With Pir
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 1. PIR ACCOMMODATING UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE This section explains how to replace unit/circuit cards mounted in the PIR. Precautions: • Use this procedure to replace a faulty unit/circuit card with a spare or to check a spare card. •...
Page 599: Pir Face Layout
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR PIR Face Layout The figure below shows the slot configuration and the condition of mounted circuit card types for PIR. Figure 5-1 Circuit card mounting of PIR PIR 0 (1-IMG) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Slot No.
Page 600: Replacement Procedure Of Line/Trunk Circuit Cards
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Replacement Procedure of Line/Trunk Circuit Cards [Start] ATTENTION STEP 1 Turn ON (upward) the MB (Make Busy) switch of the circuit card to be re- Contents Static Sensitive Handling placed. Precautions Required STEP 2 Pull out the circuit card mounted on the slot.
Page 601: Replacement Procedure Of Sdt Card And Optical Fiber Cable
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Replacement Procedure of SDT Card and Optical Fiber Cable This section explains how to replace SDT (PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB) card and the optical fiber cables that are connected to SDT card. ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling 1.3.1 How to Replace SDT (PS-SDTA/PA-SDTB)
Page 602: How To Replace Optical Fiber Cable
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR SDTB cards. STEP 11 When the new card is PA-SDTB, also connect the MT 24 TSW cables to all the required front connectors. STEP 12 Turn OFF (downward) MB key on the new PA-SDTA. STEP 13 Set P-SW key - 4 (MBR) to OFF position on the PA-SDTA.
Page 603: Replacement Procedure Of Ippad Circuit Card
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Replacement Procedure of IPPAD Circuit Card [Start] ATTENTION STEP 1 Make sure that the IPPAD to be replaced has no ongoing call. Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required • Corresponding BL lamp will light green when a channel is in use. Note: The status of each channel can be known by changing SW01 setting.
Page 604 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR STEP 4 Pull out the card mounted on the slot. STEP 5 Make sure the switch setting of the new IPPAD circuit card is the same as the one replaced. STEP 6 Turn on (upward) MB key on the new IPPAD card.
Page 605: Replacement Procedure Of Mux (Multiplexer) Circuit Card
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Replacement Procedure of MUX (Multiplexer) Circuit Card 1.5.1 MUX Replacement: 1-IMG ATTENTION This section explains the replacement procedure of MUX circuit card (PH-PC36) for 1- Contents Static Sensitive Handling IMG system. MUX circuit card is mounted on PIR 1/2/3 (Slots 13 and 14). TSW card Precautions Required is mounted on PIR0.
Page 606 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR STEP 3 Turn ON (upward) the TSW MBR key on the TSW card of STBY side. TSW ACT (TSW card) = lit (red) MUX ACT (MUX card) = off STEP 4 Is PLOACT lamp of TSW card (STBY side) to be replaced lit (green)? YES: Turn ON (upward) the PLO MB key on the TSW card to be replaced.
Page 607: Mux Replacement: 4-Img
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR STEP 15 Turn OFF the MB key on the new MUX card. • M1SY, M2SY and M3SY lamps (TSW card) = lit (green) (depending on the number of PIR) • MUXACT lamp (new MUX card) = remains off STEP 16 If PLO MB key on the TSW card is set to ON, turn it OFF.
Page 608 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR STEP 3 Turn ON (upward) the TSW MBR key on the TSW card of STBY side. TSW ACT (TSW card) = lit (red) MUX ACT (MUX card) = off STEP 4 Turn ON (upward) the MB key on the TSW card. •...
Page 609: Replacement Procedure Of Pwr (Power) Circuit Card
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Replacement Procedure of PWR (Power) Circuit Card This section explains the replacement procedure of the PWR circuit card. DC-DC PWR and DC-DC DPWR circuit cards are mounted on Slot 01 and 03 of the PIR, supplying ATTENTION the power to the circuit cards mounted on the PIR.
Page 610: Replacement Procedure Of Tsw (Time Division Switch) Circuit Card
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Replacement Procedure of TSW (Time Division Switch) Circuit Card This section explains the replacement procedure of the TSW circuit card (PH-SW10-A, etc.). TSW circuit card is to be mounted on PIR0 (Slot 13 and 14) in case of dual con- ATTENTION figuration.
Page 611 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR STEP 7 Extract the TSW card to be replaced. STEP 8 Set the keys on the new TSW card, referring to the card replaced. STEP 9 Turn ON (upward) PLO MB, TSW MBR and MB keys on the new TSW card. STEP 10 Insert the new TSW card.
Page 612: Tswr Accommodating Circuit Card Replacement Procedure (4-Img Only)
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 2. TSWR ACCOMMODATING CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE (4-IMG ONLY) This section explains the procedure for replacing circuit cards accommodated in the TSWR. 2.1 Precaution • This procedure is applied when replacing a faulty circuit card with a spare. It is also able to be applied when checking a spare card.
Page 613: Gt Card Replacement Procedure
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR GT Card Replacement Procedure GT (PH-GT09) card is mounted in slots 4 and 5 of the TSWR, providing an interface function between DLKC, TSW, MUX cards and I/O Local Bus. Figure 5-3 (Connections Between GT and CPU) IMG 0 IMG 1 IMG 2...
Page 614 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR YES: Proceed to STEP 3. NO: Changeover the ACT/STBY of speech path by using CMOD. Proceed to STEP 2. STEP 2 Make sure that the GT card to be replaced is placed in STBY mode. OPE/MB lamp on the GT card goes OFF.
Page 615: Tsw Card Replacement Procedure
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 2.3.1 TSW Card Replacement Procedure TSW circuit card is located in the slot numbers, ranging from 06 to 13 within the TSWR. Equipped with the Time Division Switch (TSW) and Speech Path Controlling Interface (INT), the card’s main function is to provide a maximum of 8192 2048 Time Slot (TS) switching for a designated single IMG.
Page 616 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR [Start] STEP 1 TSW card to be replaced is in STBY mode? Check TSW ACT lamp on the TSW card. When the lamp is off, the card is in STBY mode. YES: Proceed to STEP 3. NO: Changeover the ACT/STBY of speech path by using CMOD.
Page 617 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR • MUX ACT lights green (MUX card) [STBY side] • TSW ACT is off (TSW card) • OPE/MB is off (DLKC card) • MUX ACT is off (MUX card) [End] – 570 –...
Page 618: Dlkc Card Replacement Procedure
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 2.3.2 DLKC Card Replacement Procedure DLKC (PH-PC20) card is located in slot 02 or 03 within the TSWR. The main function is to provide all the Desk Consoles with information such as termination/answer/release (abandonment) of ATT calls or BUSY/IDLE status of stations via the link of TSW system.
Page 619 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR YES: Proceed to STEP 3. NO: Changeover the ACT/STBY of speech path by using CMOD. Proceed to STEP 2. STEP 2 Make sure that the DLKC card to be replaced is placed in STBY mode. OPE/MB lamp on the DLKC card goes OFF.
Page 620: Plo Card Replacement Procedure
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 2.3.3 PLO Card Replacement Procedure PLO (PH-CK16-D, etc) card is located in slot 14 or 15 within the TSWR. Used together with digital interface cards, the card’s main function is to establish clock synchronization on the digital network. In addition, the MUSIC ROM supplies Music-On-Hold to each station line via the TSW circuit card.
Page 621 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR YES: Proceed to STEP 3. NO: Changeover the ACT/STBY of PLO. Proceed to STEP 2. PLO ACT/STBY can be changed over by MB key operation. See “Manual Changeover of PLO” in Chap- Note: ter 2 for more details.
Page 622: Pwr Sw Card Replacement Procedure
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 2.3.4 PWR SW Card Replacement Procedure PWR SW (PH-PW14) card is located in slot 00 or 01 of TSWR. This card provides operating power for circuit cards that are accommodated in TSWR. Improper key operations may result in a system down.
Page 623: Replacement Procedure Of Cf Card
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Replacement Procedure of CF Card Always backup the current program and office data stored in CF card before replacing the CF card. ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required CF card cannot be removed while the SV8500 is in operation. Doing so stops the system WARNING operation.
Page 624: Replacement Procedure Of Fanc (Pz-M699)
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Replacement Procedure of FANC (PZ-M699) This section explains how to replace FANC (PZ-M699) that is accommodated in PIR and TSWR. The FANC controls three FANs, providing operating power to each FAN ATTENTION from the system via this card.
Page 625 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR STEP 2: Remove the front cover of FANU for the FANC to be replaced. FANU Front Cover FANC PIR/TSWR STEP 3: Turn OFF (upper) the FAN Power Switch. • All FANs stop by this operation. FAN PWR SW (upward) STEP 4: Remove the cables from the cable support.
Page 626 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR STEP 6: Remove the cables from the FANU connector using a flat-blade screwdriver. flat-blade screwdriver FANU connector STEP 7: Loosen the screws fixing the FANC brackets on both sides. screw (right screw (left) a Phillips head screwdriver STEP 8: Remove the FANC.
Page 627 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR STEP 9: Replace the FANC. • Turn OFF (upper) the FAN Power Switch on the new FANC. • FANC and the bracket must be replaced. STEP 10: Mount the new FANC to the FANU. (in reverse order shown above) •...
Page 628: Replacement Procedure Of Fans (Pir/Tswr)
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Replacement Procedure of FANs (PIR/TSWR) This section explains how to replace a FAN that is accommodated in PIR or TSWR FAN can prevent the system from overheating, which might cause malfunction or failure. We ATTENTION recommend that FAN should replace every five years.
Page 629 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR STEP 2: Remove the front cover of the rack (PIR/TSWR) located just below the FANU. FANU (PIR/TSWR) a rack located just below the FANU Front Cover STEP 3: Remove the front cover of FANU for the FANC to be replaced. FANU Front Cover FANC PIR/TSWR...
Page 630 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR • All FANs stop by this operation. FAN PWR SW (upward) STEP 5: Disconnect the cable from the FA NU connector. • Use a flat-blade screwdriver. FANU connector flat-blade screwdriver STEP 6: Loosen the screws fixing the FAN tray on both sides. screw (left) screw (right) a Phillips head screwdriver...
Page 631 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR STEP 7: Pull the FAN tray toward you as shown below. FAN tray STEP 8: Unfasten the FAN cables from the cable support. STEP 9: Replace the FAN to be replaced. • Disconnect FAN0, FAN1, or FAN2 connector.
Page 632 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Insert the FAN connector firmly to the appropriate FAN connector until you hear an audible click. Note: STEP 10: Attach the FAN tray again. • Insert the FAN tray to the original position. •...
Page 633: Replacement Procedure Of 1U–C/Dc Power Unit On 9U–Ir (Dc Power Input Version)
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Replacement Procedure of 1U–C/DC Power Unit on 9U–IR (DC Power Input Version) This section explains how to change the 1U–C/DC Power Unit from a Single Power Configuration to a Dual Power Configuration as well as replacing the power units. AC/DC power unit is in Single Power Configuration for shipping.
Page 634: Procedure For Upgrading To Dual Power Configuration
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Dual Power Configuration Power Switch AC/DC power unit #0 AC/DC power unit #1 LOCK key 2.7.1 Procedure for Upgrading to Dual Power Configuration STEP 1 Unlock the blank unit. Slide the LOCK key up to unlock the unit.
Page 635 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Blank Unit with One LOCK Key Front View STEP 3 Slide in the new AC/DC power unit. Check that the OPE lamp light is ON and the FAN is turn- ing. STEP 4 Slide the LOCK key downward to lock the unit.
Page 636: Procedure For Replacing #0 Side Of Ac/Dc Power Unit
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 2.7.2 Procedure for Replacing #0 Side of AC/DC Power Unit STEP 1 Turn the power switch OFF for #0 side of AC/DC power unit. Power Switch for #0 Turn the switch to left side (OFF) STEP 2 Unlock the #0 side of AC/DC power unit.
Page 637: Replacement Procedure Of Fuse
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Replacement Procedure of Fuse The system uses the following fuses as a protection against an overload resulting from a short circuit. ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1.5A 12.5V When excessive current is applied to a PWR circuit card, the related fuse is blown. The blown fuse after a fault can be confirmed as shown in the following figure.
Page 638 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR The following figure shows the location of fuses for the system. P Z - P A - 5 4 - P A - 5 5 - 1 . 0 F U S 5 .
Page 639 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Perform the following procedure to confirm the cause of the RGU fuse blown fault. Start Visual check: No pin contacting or backboard melting? OPE Lamp (green) of each LC card remains lit? 1.
Page 640 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Perform the following procedure to confirm the cause of the DC-48V fuse blown fault (PIR). Start Visual check: No pin contacting or backboard melting? OPE Lamps (green) of LC/TRK/NCU cards remain lit? 1.
Page 641 Perform the following procedure to confirm the cause of the DC-48V fuse blown fault (TSWR). Start Visual check: No pin contacting or backboard melting? OPE Lamps (green) of TSWR cards remain lit? 1. Turn ON (UP) the MB key on the circuit card. 2.
Page 642: Fault Repair Procedure
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 3. FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURE This section provides information on how to repair the fault(s) within the system. If any of the components or equipment listed in Table 5-1 has a failure, move on to the repair procedure explained for each faulty condition. Table 5-1 Fault Repair Procedure Quick Reference FAULTY ITEM FAULTY SITUATION...
Page 643 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Table 5-1 Fault Repair Procedure Quick Reference (Continued) FAULTY ITEM FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION Section 4.5.2, Speech Path System Faults related to speech. Fault - Fault Related to Speech Section 4.5.3, Speech Path System Dial tone is not heard.
Page 644: Line Fault
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR LINE FAULT This section explains the fault repair procedure in a case where only one specific station line is in any of the faulty conditions listed in Table 5-2. Table 5-2 Line Fault Situation FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION When Dial Tone cannot be heard...
Page 645: Line Control
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 3.1.2 Line Control Each line in a specific Line Circuit (LC/ELC) card is controlled by the PM in that line circuit card. The line circuit cards are controlled from Telephony Server via the MUX. The following figure shows the control route of line circuit cards.
Page 646: Line Fault - When Dt Cannot Be Heard
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 3.1.3 Line Fault - When DT Cannot Be Heard If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty, no other lines in that circuit card can be used Note: until the replacement is complete.
Page 647: Line Fault - When Dialing Results In Wrong Connection
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 3.1.4 Line Fault - When Dialing Results in Wrong Connection If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty, no other lines in that circuit card can be used Note: until the replacement is complete.
Page 648: Line Fault - When Bell Does Not Ring
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 3.1.5 Line Fault - When Bell Does Not Ring If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty, no other lines in that circuit card can be used Note: until the replacement is complete.
Page 649: When Call Cannot Be Answered And Speech Cannot Be Made
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 3.1.6 When Call Cannot Be Answered and Speech Cannot Be Made If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty, no other lines in that circuit card can be used Note: until the replacement is complete.
Page 650: Line Fault - Dterm
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 3.1.7 Line fault - Dterm [1] When using LC/ELC circuit card. If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty, no other lines in that circuit card can be used Note: until the replacement is complete.
Page 651: Trunk Fault
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR TRUNK FAULT This paragraph explains the fault repair procedure when a fault, shown in Table 5-3, has occurred to a spe- cific trunk. Table 5-3 Trunk Fault Situation TRUNK FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION No connection can be set up.
Page 652 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Table 5-4 Timings for Trunks ITEMS FOR STATUS CONDITIONS FOR SUPERVISION TIMING SPECIFICATIONS SUPERVISION • Ringdown System Detection by ringing signal (20Hz) from Ringing signal of more than four the opposite office. cycles is detected within 800 Detection of Call •...
Page 653 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR ITEMS FOR STATUS CONDITIONS FOR SUPERVISION TIMING SPECIFICATIONS SUPERVISION • Loop System Detection of polarity reversal across tip and Detection of Release at the 608 milliseconds (standard) ring. time of Outgoing Timing can be assigned using the Connection •...
Page 654: Trunk Control
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 3.2.2 Trunk Control Trunk circuit cards are controlled from the CPU via the MUX. Each trunk line in a specific trunk circuit card is controlled by the Port Microprocessor (PM) in a trunk circuit card. Figure 5-7 shows the control route of the trunk circuit card.
Page 655: Trunk (Ort, Snd, Cft) Fault
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 3.2.3 Trunk (ORT, SND, CFT) Fault If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty, no other lines in that circuit card can be used Note: until the replacement is complete. (1) When only one line is faulty.
Page 656: Trunk (Cot, Tlt, Dti) Fault
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 3.2.4 Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI) Fault If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty, any other lines in that circuit card cannot be Note: used until the replacement is complete. If the polarities of the external line are reversed, it is detected in the form of Trunk Ineffective Hold.
Page 657 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR When performing loop-back connection tests on the trunks at the user’s office, provide cross connection Note: as follows: (1) For a COT • Set up a loop-back connection between the C.O. Trunk (COT) to be tested and station line. •...
Page 658 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR • If the TLT is a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Trunk, connect the related leads as shown below: • If the TLT is a 4-wire E & M System, connect the related leads as shown below: Receive Receive Send...
Page 659: Attcon/Deskcon Fault
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Loop-back Cross Connection Receive Send 4. ATTCON/DESKCON FAULT This section explains the fault repair procedure when a specific Attendant Console (ATTCON) is in any of the following faulty conditions. • No speech can be made. •...
Page 660 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Figure 5-8 ATT Connector Cabling and Connector Leads Accommodation Location of ATT connector ATI card mounting location LT11/PLO LT10 PIR (Rear) PIR (Front) Note DESK CONSOLE DESK CONSOLE For more detailed information on the wiring, refer to Circuit Card Description. Note: –...
Page 661: Attcon/Deskcon Fault
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 4.3 ATTCON/DESKCON Fault No speech can be made. Note 1: While replacement of the ATI circuit Note 2: card for the primary ATTCON/DESK- ATTENTION CON is in progress, the system is placed Contents Static Sensitive under Night Mode.
Page 662 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR No operations can be made. Note: ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required START Replace the ATTCON/DESKCON with a Set the MB switch of ATI PA-CS33 circuit spare. card UP. If the circuit card is equipped with a fuse, remove the fuse.
Page 663: Unit Fault
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR UNIT FAULT This section explains the fault repair procedure in a case where any of the faults shown in Table 5-6 has occurred to all the line/trunk circuit cards mounted in a specific unit. Figure 5-6 shows the range of units. Table 5-6 Unit Fault Situation FAULT SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION...
Page 664: Check Point (1/2)
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 4.4.1 Check Point (1/2) Confirm the data shown below when service features cannot be assigned or service cannot be operated: (1) Confirm that line capacity of physical PIR and virtual PIR is set correctly. (2) Confirm that value of ASYD command to display LP mounting status is assigned as below.
Page 665 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Unit structure of PIR is as shown below. Note that the following shows a DC type as an example. Figure 5-9 Unit Data (1-IMG) PIR3 PIR2 PIR1 FANU PIR0 SV8500 Server Figure 5-10 Unit Data (4-IMG) FANU TSWR FANU...
Page 666: Check Point (2/2)
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 4.4.2 Check Point (2/2) When repairing a unit fault, consider the following items: (1) Speech paths and control paths in the unit are connected to line/trunks via the MUX circuit cards. Be sure to check the alarm lamps on the MUX circuit cards, and check to see if the front cable between each MUX circuit card and TSW circuit card is connected correctly.
Page 667 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Figure 5-12 Unit Control Block Diagram (Single Configuration) Clock Speech Path Control of LC/TRK Line/ Trunk LC/TRK Circuit Card Figure 5-13 MUX Card Locations MUX card is mounted in Slot 13 and/or 14 of each PIR. Note PIR 3 UNIT = 2 UNIT = 3...
Page 668: Unit Fault - Fault Related To Speech
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 4.4.3 Unit Fault - Fault Related to Speech Faulty Situation: • Noise, one-way speech, no tone, etc. occurs only within a unit. • Even if dialing has started, dial tone does not stop. Exchange the TSW circuit card when MUX is not mounted on PIR.
Page 669 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR <<For Single Configuration>> <<Check by replacing the MUX circuit card.>> (1) After replacement of the MUX circuit card, make a station-to-station call in the faulty unit and see if speech is normal. (a) Replace the MUX circuit card by referring to Section 1.5, Replacement Procedure of MUX (Multi- plexer) Circuit...
Page 670: Unit Fault - When Dial Tone (Dt) Cannot Be Heard
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 4.4.4 Unit Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard Faulty Situation: • Dial Tone (DT) cannot be heard except within a unit. • [4-T] Both MUX Failure / [4-S] MUX Ready Failure •...
Page 671 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR (3) Extract all the line/trunk circuit cards from their mounting slots in the unit. Insert the cards back into their slots one after another and see if the dial tone is heard each time. (a) Extract all the line/trunk circuit cards from their slots.
Page 672 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR (d) Confirm the OPE lamp of the inserted circuit card illuminates by setting the MB switch DOWN. (e) Make a station-to-station call and see if dial tone can be heard. [If DT is heard, check the next circuit card.] [If DT is not heard, replace the circuit card with a spare.] Perform this check on the rest of the circuit cards by inserting them into their individual slots.
Page 673: Unit Fault - Act-Side Mux Card Is Faulty And System Has Changed Over
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 4.4.5 Unit Fault - ACT-Side MUX Card Is Faulty and System Has Changed Over Faulty Situation: • The ACT side has become faulty and the system changeover has executed in the dual configuration system. •...
Page 674: Speech Path (Tsw) System Fault
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR SPEECH PATH (TSW) SYSTEM FAULT This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the faults shown in Table 5-7 has occurred in the whole system. Table 5-7 Speech Path (TSW) System Fault Situation FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION •...
Page 675: Check Point
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 4.5.1 Check Point When repairing a speech path fault, consider that when any of the faults shown in Table 5-14 have occurred in the system, it is possible that the TSW circuit card is at fault. Always check the alarm lamps on the TSW circuit card.
Page 676 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Speech Path Block Diagram (4-IMG [1/2]) IMG0 IMG1 PIR3 PIR 3 LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK PIR 2 PIR 2 LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK PIR 1 PIR 1 LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK...
Page 677 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Speech Path Block Diagram (4-IMG [2/2]) Figure 5-16 IMG2 IMG3 PIR 3 PIR 3 LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK PIR 2 PIR2 LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK PIR 1 PIR1 LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK...
Page 678: Speech Path System Fault - Fault Related To Speech
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 4.5.2 Speech Path System Fault - Fault Related to Speech Faulty Situation: • Fault related to speech such as noise, one-way speech, no-speed, etc. occurs. • Even if dialing is made, Dial Tone (DT) does not stop. •...
Page 679 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR <<For Single Configuration>> (1) Check to see if fault occurs by replacing TSW circuit cards. (a) Replace the TSW circuit card by referring to Replacement Procedure of TSW (Time Division Switch) Circuit Card. (b) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card responsi- ble for the fault.
Page 680: Speech Path System Fault - When Dial Tone (Dt) Cannot Be Heard
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 4.5.3 Speech Path System Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard Faulty Situation: • Dial Tone (DT) cannot be heard. • [1-A] Both TSW Failure (Permanent) • [1-E] Both TSW Clock Failure •...
Page 681: Speech Path System Fault - Stby Side Has Become Fault
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 4.5.4 Speech Path System Fault - STBY Side Has Become Fault Faulty Situation: • A fault has occurred in the STBY side of the Dual Configuration system. • [1-B] TSW Failure (Permanent) •...
Page 682 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Faulty Situation: • Fault related to speech such as noise, one-way speech, no-speed, etc. occurs. • Even if dialling is made, Dial Tone (DT) does not stop. • [1-C] Both TSW Write Failure •...
Page 683: Control System Fault
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR CONTROL SYSTEM FAULT This section explains the fault repair procedure for the control system listed in Table 5-8. Table 5-8 Control System Fault Situation FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION Section 4.7.1, Control System Fault - Fault Occurs Fault occurs occasionally at the STBY side.
Page 684: Check Point
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Check Point When repairing the control system, check the status of the following lamps: • Telephony Server (TP/SP)TSW lamp • Telephony Server (TP/SP) MUX lamp – 637 –...
Page 685 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR The following figures show a block diagram of the CPU controlling block, where CPU 0 is active. Figure 5-17 CPU Controlling Block Diagram (1-IMG) PM Bus LC/TRK LC/TRK PIR3 PM Bus LC/TRK LC/TRK PIR2 PM Bus...
Page 686 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Figure 5-18 CPU Controlling Block Diagram (4-IMG) IMG0 IMG1 PIR 3 PIR 3 PM BUS PM BUS LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK PM BUS PM BUS PIR 2 PIR 2 PM BUS PM BUS LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK...
Page 687: Control System Fault - Fault Occurs Intermittently On Act Side
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 4.7.1 Control System Fault - Fault Occurs Intermittently on ACT side Faulty Situation: • Fault occurs intermittently. • [0-C] ~ [0-J] CPU Failure • [1-C] Both TSW Write Failure • [1-D] TSW Write Failure •...
Page 688 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR • Replacement Procedure of TSW (Time Division Switch) Circuit Card • Replacement Procedure of MUX (Multiplexer) Circuit Card (2) Initialize the system by pressing INIT button on the EMA card. (3) Check to see that any fault information is displayed. –...
Page 689: Control System Fault - Stby Side Is Faulty
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 4.8 Control System Fault - STBY Side Is Faulty Faulty Situation: • Fault has occurred at the STBY side of Dual Configuration system. ATTENTION • [0-I] STBY CPU Failure. Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required •...
Page 690 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 4-IMG START Replace STBY-side related circuit cards Replace the circuit cards (CPU, GT, TSW, (CPU, GT, TSW, MUX, EMA) with a spare, MUX, EMA) individually by referring to the and check.
Page 691: Fault That Cannot Be Detected
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 4.8.1 Fault That Cannot Be Detected If the SV8500 server does not detect faults that occur in the system, do the following: STEP 1 Check the alarm cable connections referring to the figure below. STEP 2 Check the wiring on the MDF when Audible Visual Alarm Indicating Panel is used.
Page 692: Power Supply Fault
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Power Supply Fault This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the faults shown in Table 5-9 occur. Table 5-9 PWR Supply Fault Situation FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION When the “RGU” / “-48V” Fuse has Blown Section 4.9.2, Fuse Blown Fault Section 4.9.3, Circuit Breaker OFF Fault in PWR DC-DC PWR Circuit Card Breaker OFF, Fault in PWR Supply...
Page 693 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR (3) The figures below show the block diagrams for the power supply to each module. Figure 5-20 Block Diagram of Power Supply System [PIR] Power Receiving Terminal PWR 0 PIR3 N o t e LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX 0...
Page 694 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR (4) The figures below show the power supply system for PIR and TSWR. Figure 5-21 Power Supply to PIR PWR 0 PWR 1 DC-DC DC-DC CONV CONV +5V, +12V, -5V CR (for LC) HOW (for LC) -48V -48V...
Page 695: Fuse Blown Fault
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 4.9.2 Fuse Blown Fault (1) Check the backplane of the PIR. (a) Make a visual check on the backplane for pin contacting, melting or burn, etc. (2) Extract all the circuit cards from the PIR, and insert them back into their slots individually to see if the fuse blows.
Page 696: Fault Of Alarm Lamps On Pwr Supply
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 4.9.4 Fault of Alarm Lamps on PWR Supply (1) Press RESET button of the PWR supply. [Alarm lamp goes out] • FAULT SUPERVISION [Alarm lamp illuminates again] (a) Set the MB switch on the PWR supply UP. (b) Turn circuit breaker OFF.
Page 697: Fan Unit Fault
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 4.10 Fan Unit Fault This section explains the fault repair procedure where a fan in the Fan Unit (FANU) does not operate. 4.10.1 Check Point STEP 1 If a specific fan does not work, and other fans are operating, replace the specific fan with a new one, referring to “Replacement Procedure of FANs (PIR/TSWR)”.
Page 698: Tone Fault
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 4.11 Tone Fault This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the various tones cannot be heard in the whole system. 4.11.1 Check Point When repairing a tone fault, consider that the tone generator circuit is equipped in the TSW circuit card and supplies tone.
Page 699 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR STEP 3 Check cable connections in the system. Figure 5-25 Cable Connections for External Music-On-Hold (for 1-IMG) PIR3 PIR2 External MOH Equipment PIR1 PIR0 D15F EXALM CA-A MUSIC IMG0 EXALM MUSIC D15 ST-FF CA-A EMA SUB-A Music-On-Hold SV8500 Server...
Page 700 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Figure 5-26 Cable Connections for External Music-On-Hold (4-IMG) D37 EXCLK CA-A Installation Cable External MOH Equipment Installation Cable Music-On-Hold TSWR EMA SUB-A IMG0 MUSIC EXALM EMA SUB-B IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 TSWR MISCR SV8500 Server Rear View –...
Page 701: Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (Ccis) Line Fault
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 4.12 Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (CCIS) Line Fault This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the faults shown in Table 5-10 occur to a spe- cific CCIS line. Table 5-10 CCIS Line Fault Situation FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION A specific CCH/CCT card is faulty.
Page 702: Specific Cch/Cct Card Is Faulty
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Figure 5-27 Controlling CCIS Line LT Cable Front Cable To CCIS Line LT Cable 4.12.3 Specific CCH/CCT Card Is Faulty (1) Check by replacing CCH/CCT card with a spare. (a) On CCH/CCT card, set the MBR switch UP. (b) On CCH/CCT card, set MBR switch UP and extract the card from its mounting slot.
Page 703 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR (c) On DTI cards, set MB switch DOWN. On CCH card, set MBR switch DOWN. (d) Check whether the fault is still indicated. (2) Check by replacing the DTI card with spare. (a) On DTI card, set MB switch UP and extract the card from the mounting slot.
Page 704: Integrated Service Digital Network (Isdn) Line Fault
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 4.13 Integrated Service Digital Network (ISDN) Line Fault This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the faults shown in Table 5-11 occur to a spe- cific ISDN. Table 5-11 ISDN Line Fault Situation FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION A specific CCH/CCT card is faulty.
Page 705: Specific Dch/Prt Card Is Faulty
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 4.13.3 Specific DCH/PRT Card Is Faulty (1) Check by replacing the DCH/PRT card with a spare. (a) On DCH/PRT card, set MBR switch UP. (b) On DCH/PRT card, set MB switch UP and extract the card from its mounting slot. (c) Make switch setting on a new DCH/PRT card.
Page 706: System Operation
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 5. SYSTEM OPERATION This section explains the system operation of the system with PIR. – 659 –...
Page 707: Indication Of Lockout Stations
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Indication of Lockout Stations When a station is in lockout status (permanent signaling state, shorting across speech wires, etc.), it can quickly be discovered, preventing the situation from developing into serious trouble. (1) Indicating Method By entering the following commands from PCPro, information pertaining to the lockout station concerned will display.
Page 708: Recovery Procedure
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Recovery Procedure Figure 5-29 Recovery Procedure From Lockout Station (1 of 2) Go on-hook and then go off-hook again. Confirm the state of the handset of If dial tone is heard, the station is in permanent the displayed station.
Page 709 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Figure 5-29 Recovery Procedure From Lockout Station (2 of 2) Forcibly release the lockout station circuit. RLST command (Confirm: DT) Go off-hook again and confirm DT. Circuit may be faulty temporarily. Hear DT? Observe situation for a while.
Page 710: Line Load Control
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Line Load Control In the Telephony Server system, Line Load Control can be activated automatically or manually as a countermeasure against abnormal traffic congestion towards the stations accommodated in the PIR. In the case of automatic control, the system automatically monitors an overloaded situation and restricts outgoing calls from stations and incoming calls from trunks.
Page 711 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR • Cancelling Figure 5-31 Line Load Control Operations on ATTCON—Cancelling Press LOOP key. Dial the access code for cancelling Line Load Control. • Lamp (Figure 5-32) on control panel lights. • System Message [6-D] displays. (SST) Press CANCEL key.
Page 712 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR • Setting Figure 5-33 Line Load Control Key Operations on DESKCON—Setting Press Lx (L1-L6) key. Dial the access code for setting Line Load Control. • LLC displays on desk console (Figure 6-12). •...
Page 713 CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Figure 5-35 Line Load Control Indication (DESKCON) LLC is displayed on a Desk Console, when Line Load Control starts. Line Load indication Desk Console (3) Operations on PCPro Line Load Control operates by entering the ALLC command from PCPro. Stations with RES=0 assigned for ASFC SFI=16 (Line Load Control) will be restricted to originate a call.
Page 714: Ioc Line Monitor
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR IOC LINE MONITOR (1) Functional Outline This function monitors the IOC port status. As a result of the monitoring by this function, the following is executed: • When the connection with a port has been disconnected, it is reported by a message. •...
Page 715: Line Management
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR Line Management The following explanations apply to line management: • Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of Station and Data Terminal • Class Change and Number Change of Station and Data Terminal • Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of C.O. Line/Tie Line Make-Busy means a status rejecting any registration so as to change its equipment, etc.
Page 716: Class Change And Number Change Of Station And Data Terminal
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 5.5.2 Class Change and Number Change of Station and Data Terminal Figure 5-36 shows the procedure for class change and number change of station and data terminal. Figure 5-36 Class Change and Number Change of Station and Data Terminal Procedure START Line Make-Busy •...
Page 717: Circuit Card Initialization Procedure
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 5.5.4 Circuit Card Initialization Procedure Circuit Card Initialization procedure for LINE/TRUNK circuit card is as follows. (1) Turn the MB switch of circuit card to ON (upward). (2) Turn back down the circuit card to OFF (downward) and confirm that MB lamp light green. When initialization is executed, all calls using that circuit card will be disconnected and all channels will Note: be make-busy state.
Page 718: How To Turn On/Off Whole System
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR How to Turn ON/OFF Whole System This section explains the order to turn ON/OFF the power of the whole system when PIR is mounted. ATTENTION Contents Be sure to follow the procedures below to power on/off the system. Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required...
Page 719: Sv8500 Server Power On/Off Procedure
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 5.6.2 SV8500 Server Power ON/OFF Procedure [AC-Powered Model of SV8500 Server] Turn ON: ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive STEP 1: Connect an AC power code to AC inlet on Power module (on the rear panel of Handling Precautions Required SV8500 server module).
Page 720: Pir Power On/Off Procedure
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 5.6.3 PIR Power ON/OFF Procedure [Turn ON/OFF Procedure: AC-Powered Model of PIR] Turn ON: ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive STEP 1: Connect an AC power code to AC inlet on AC-DC Power Unit. AC-DC Power Handling Precautions Required Unit is powered on here (OPE lamp lights and fans start turning).
Page 721: Tswr Power On/Off Procedure
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR 5.6.4 TSWR Power ON/OFF Procedure Turn ON: STEP 1: Supply the power to BASEU. When the power cable between BASEU and ATTENTION Contents TSWR is connected, BASEU starts supplying the power to TSWR here. Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required...
Page 722: Chapter 6 Routine Maintenance Procedure
CHAPTER 6 Routine Maintenance Procedure CHAPTER 6 Routine Maintenance Procedure 1. GENERAL This chapter explains the routine maintenance procedure of SV8500 system. Even if the system is operating normally, it is necessary to perform a routine check to prevent a fault occurrence before it is too late to discover any latent cause of a fault.
Page 723: Test Equipment And Tools
CHAPTER 6 Routine Maintenance Procedure 2.1 Test Equipment and Tools Test equipment and tools needed for routine maintenance test are shown in the list below. Table 6-1 List of equipment and tools for routine maintenance TEST EQUIPMENT/ PURPOSE REMARKS TOOLS Telephone Set A telephone set is used when performing connection tests on trunks, etc.
Page 724: Check The Temperature And Relative Humidity In The Switch Room
CHAPTER 6 Routine Maintenance Procedure 2.2.1 Check the Temperature and Relative Humidity in the Switch Room (1) Temperature check in the switch room. • Check whether the room temperature is within the range of 5°C (41°F) to 30°C (86°F). (2) Check the humidity in the room. •...
Page 725: Check To See If There Is Any Lockout Station
CHAPTER 6 Routine Maintenance Procedure 2.2.4 Check To See If There Is Any Lockout Station <<Check the displays of relevant commands to locate any locked-out stations.>> (1) Check the displays of the following commands. (a) DLSL: Display in the order of LENS (b) DLSS: Display in the order of station numbers [When any station in locked-out state is displayed] •...
Page 726: Routine Maintenance Check List
CHAPTER 6 Routine Maintenance Procedure 2.3 Routine Maintenance Check List This section provides check lists (Maintenance Procedure Reports) used when performing routine maintenance Routine Maintenance Check Lists consist of the following: • Maintenance Procedure Report • C.O. Trunk/TIE Line • Register/Sender Trunk (RST) •...
Page 727 CHAPTER 6 Routine Maintenance Procedure User Name Signature of Supervisor Work Time (From - Name of User (Company) Date: Maintenance Routine/Non- Classification routine Control No. Maintenance Company Name of Equipment Room Temperature - °C Name of Worker °F & humidity% Item Detail Check...
Page 728 CHAPTER 6 Routine Maintenance Procedure ndition And Caus Procedure and Parts Used – 681 –...
Page 729 CHAPTER 6 Routine Maintenance Procedure C.O. Trunk/TIE Line ACCESS ROUTE TRUNK NAME OF TRUNK ROUTE CHECK REMARKS NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER – 682 –...
Page 730 CHAPTER 6 Routine Maintenance Procedure Register/Sender Trunk (RST) TEST TYPE TEST ITEM CONNECTION DIAGRAM ORT Function • Perform the test by specifying DP/PB an ORT with the Connection Test Station. • Confirm that System Message [6-I] displays as a result of the test.
Page 731 CHAPTER 6 Routine Maintenance Procedure RST ( / ) FUNCTION SENDER REMARKS TRUNK NO. PB RECEIVING DP RECEIVING ORT0 SND0 RST No. RST No. RST No. RST No. – 684 –...
Page 732 CHAPTER 6 Routine Maintenance Procedure Digital Conference Function TEST TYPE TEST ITEM CONNECTION DIAGRAM Three-way • Perform the test by specifying Conversation an 8CFT with the Connection Test Station. INT / TSW • Confirm that System Message 8CFT [6-I] displays as a result of the test.
Page 733 CHAPTER 6 Routine Maintenance Procedure Speech Path for Each PIR, and Ringing Generator Unit (Continued) TEST TYPE TEST ITEM CONNECTION DIAGRAM The operator calls After normal speech path has the station back. been confirmed, the attendant calls the station back. Confirm ATTCON/ that the station rings.
Page 734 CHAPTER 6 Routine Maintenance Procedure Attendant Console (ATTCON/DESKCON) TEST TYPE TEST ITEM CONNECTION DIAGRAM Call Termination Test • Station dials the operator access code and confirms that the call termination is indicated at all the ATTCON/ DESKCON. • Station dials the operator access code.
Page 735 CHAPTER 6 Routine Maintenance Procedure FUNCTION CALL TERMINATION CALL ORIGINATION REMARKS INCOMING CALL ATTCON/ SPEECH RELEASE SPEECH RELEASE INDICATION DESKCON NO. – 688 –...
Page 736: Chapter 7 Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands 1. GENERAL This chapter explains various commands and list up commands that are used in the system administrative management procedure. The table below shows the list of commands. Table 7-1 Command List COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME REMARKS...
Page 737 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Table 7-1 Command List COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME REMARKS COSSL Control of SIP Server Data for LDM COSSN Control of SIP Server Data for NDM CPBKN Continuous Assignment of System Phone Book for NDM CPCP Control of PC Port CPRS Controlled Alternate PRSCs CSCL...
Page 738 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Table 7-1 Command List COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME REMARKS DPTR Display of Capacity / License DSTN Display of Station Data DTELN Display of Telephone Number Data for NDM DTF101 Display of Terminal Traffic Data DTF102 Display of Route Traffic Data DTF103 Display of Station Peg Count Data DTF104...
Page 739 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Table 7-1 Command List COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME REMARKS IPAN Display of IP machine status display function MBCT Make-Busy of Connection Trunk for LDM MBCTC Make-Busy of Connection Trunk-Continuous for LDM MBLE Make-Busy of LENS MBPH Make Busy of PHL Package for LDM MBPM Make-Busy of Port Microprocessor...
Page 740 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Table 7-1 Command List COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME REMARKS SRTS Scanning of Route Status SRTS_LR Scanning of Route Status - Logical Route Number TOGC Test of Originating Connection – 693 –...
Page 741: Aact Assignment Of Activation Code
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands AACT: Assignment of Activation Code 1. Functional Outline This command is used to register an Activation Code. Registering the activation code clears the alarm, which requires the user to input the activation code. Before executing this command, specify the following with ASYDL command. Note: SYS1 INDEX513: 01 2.
Page 742: Allc Assignment Of Line Load Control
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands ALLC: Assignment of Line Load Control 1. Functional Outline This command is used to specify the start and stop of Line Load Control. 2. Parameters Input Data ALL/ONE: Operation Mode Selection (1,2) A=All LPs A is not valid for 1-IMG-system. O=Only One LP Local Partition (LP) Number This parameter appears when O (only one LP) is set in ALL/ONE input data.
Page 743: Almg Assignment Of Alarm Grade Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands ALMG: Assignment of Alarm Grade Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to make a flexible change of the system message output grade and alarm lamp grade. The SV8500 user can give a proper output grade and alarm lamp grade to each system message according to their requirements.
Page 744 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands 1=Output the fault higher than Grade 1 (SUP/MN/MJ) 2=Output the fault higher than Grade 2 (MN/MJ) 3=Output the fault higher than Grade 3 (MJ) LLMG (Listup of Alarm Grade Data) command TYPE: Listup Type (1-3) 1=All data 2=Change data 3=Default data –...
Page 745: Aone Assignment Of One Activation Password Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands AONE: Assignment of One Activation Password Data 1. Function Outline This command is used to assign the Software Keycode of the Generic Software when login to the PCPro became unavailable by system changeover of the dual configuration system. This command can be used only for three days after it is last used.
Page 746: Asecl Assignment Of Security Data (Ldm)
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands ASECL:Assignment of Security Data (LDM) 1. Function Outline This command assigns one-time password and its available period. It also lists terminals that have completed the SIP authentication. 2. Parameters Input data <Certified Terminal Assignment> One-Time Password: Enter a one-time password.
Page 747: Assw Assignment Of Soft Sw Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands ASSW: Assignment of Soft SW Data 1. Function Outline This command changes and displays the settings of software switches on the CPU board. The software switch data assigned by this command can be backed up by the MEM_HDD command. Us- Note: ing the MEM_HDD command, the backed up data can be verified.
Page 748 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands SYSTEM SELECT 3: SW: 1-8 (Not used) STS: OFF (Fixed) – 701 –...
Page 749: Atdl Assignment Of Terminal For Download
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands ATDL: Assignment of Terminal for Download 1. General This command assigns the data for downloading the new firmware to IP terminals. Only the IP terminals that have established registration to the MGC can download the new firmware. Note: Be sure to upload the required new firmware files to the FTP server using ADTM command before ex- Note:...
Page 750 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands <Option> Specify File Storage Directory: Click this check box to specify the directory where the firmware files are stored on the FTP Server, and enter the directory name within 63 characters. Do not use this operation in SV8500. Note: Specify Download Time: Click this check box to activate automatic download at a specified time.
Page 751 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Terminal Firmware Search The range of firmware version is confined by designating the Firmware Version (xx.xx) and Search Condition (‘!=’, ‘<‘, ‘<=’, ‘==’, ‘>=’, ‘>’). The function of Terminal Firmware Search is available for 2-byte firmware version of terminals only. Note: Result of Search Pressing Search button lists up the retrieved terminal information after specifying the search conditions of target...
Page 752 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands <Firmware File Name> The information of already registered firmware files are shown on Registered File Name List field (by reading out “TermFile.txt” file when the ATDL command is executed). The listed firmware files are to be downloaded to the specified terminals according to each terminal type and version.
Page 753 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Terminal Avail- File Name Terms in Manual Product Name Type on abil- Product Name (Default) PCPro MC4AMG2A PFT- MC&MG with PFT MCMG Box MG-4LC2COTA [MG-4LC2COTA] MCMG Card SCA-4LC2COTA mcmgmwlist.txt [SCA-4LC2COTA] MCMG Box MG-7COTA [MG-7COTA] MCMG Card SCA-7COTA [SCA-7COTA] MG-COT Card...
Page 754 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Terminal Avail- File Name Terms in Manual Product Name Type on abil- Product Name (Default) PCPro DtermIP (Proprie- ITR-4D/8D/16D/ tary Protocol) DtermIP ramhp2pw.out 16LD/32D Note 3 DtermIP (SIP) ITN-4D/8D/16D/ Dterm- appsipe.tgz Note 4 32D Note 5 SIP(ITN) DT700 Series DT710...
Page 755 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Available firmware version is 3.0.0.0 or later. Note 5: This command does not support the following Terminal Types even if they are displayed in the Regis- Note: tered File Name List. Do not use the following Terminal Types and their additional information in the list.
Page 756: Atrf Assignment Of Traffic Measurement Order
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands ATRF: Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order 1. Functional Outline This command is used to assign and delete traffic measurement programs. A request for traffic measurement is performed when a traffic measurement instruction has been assigned by this command. The collected traffic measurement data can be stored on the HD of the PCPro, that can be designated on the basis of the traffic measurement type.
Page 757 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands End RT:End External Route Number (available when TYPE 2/5/8 is selected) Start C_RT:Start Connection Route Number (available when TYPE 18/19 is selected) End C_RT:End Connection Route Number (available when TYPE 18/19 is selected) Start NODE:Start Node Number End NODE:End Node Number Assign the traffic measurement time period between Start TIME and End TIME longer than an hour.
Page 758: Atrfn Assignment Of Traffic Measurement Order For Fccs Network
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands ATRFN: Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order for FCCS Network 1. Functional Outline This command is used to assign and delete traffic measurement programs available on the Ethernet. A request for traffic measurement is performed on a network basis when a traffic measurement instruction has been assigned by this command.
Page 759 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands If the data for this command is assigned, the node-level data by the ATRF command is not cleared, but Note: loses its validity (the network-level data takes precedence). When time difference exists between the nodes, confirm that the related time difference data, based on Note 1: Universal Coordinated Time (UCT) standard, has been assigned at each node via ATDF command.
Page 760: Avern Assignment Of Software Version Information (Ndm) For Fusion Network
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands AVERN: Assignment of Software Version Information (NDM) For Fusion Net- work 1. Function Outline This command assigns/deletes the program version data to/from NDM. In order to avoid misoperation, do not open this command from multiple PCPros simultaneously. Note: 2.
Page 761 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands (b) NODE that SOFTVER is different exists. As a result of the data readout, the different SOFTVER (ROM)s coexist in the same network. FPC of the corresponding node is not indicated because it is impossible to determine which SOFT- VER(ROM) is correct.
Page 762 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands SOFTVER (ROM): The program version actually installed to each node (in hexadecimal). Information: If an error occurs, the corresponding error message is displayed. – 715 –...
Page 763: Bosd Back Up One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands BOSD: Back Up One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to save the data of One-Touch Speed Call Data into the FD or HD, and load the data from the FD or HD. The One-Touch Speed Call Data, registered to the Dterm, is saved in the memory of the connected ELC/DLC.
Page 764: Cadsd Continuous Assignment Of Station Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CADSD: Continuous Assignment of Station Data 1. Functional Outline This command can assign/delete many station data with consecutive numbers at once. 2. Parameters Input Data Type: Assign/Delete [When Assign is selected in the TYPE selection list box] TN(START): Start Tenant Number TN(END): End Tenant Number STN(START): Start Station Number [maximum six digits]...
Page 765 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands In the parameter here, specify the size of increment between the consecutive station numbers to be as- Note 2: signed. See the example below: Example: RESULT INPUT DATA STN(START)=100 A Station Number is assigned by increments of 10: STN(END)=200 -When asterisk (*) and number (#) are not used as part of STN 100 110 120 130...
Page 766 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands When DELETE is selected in the TYPE selection list box Input Data TN(START): First Tenant Number TN(END): Last Tenant Number STN(START): First Station Number [maximum six digits] STN(END): Last Station Number [maximum six digits] STEP: Station Count-up Step Note 1 If using asterisk (*) and number (#) [1-12]...
Page 767: Carr Continuous Assignment Of Alternative Route Restriction
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CARR: Continuous Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction 1. Functional Outline This command is used to continuously assign/delete the restriction data of relay connections between the outgoing route and the incoming route. 2. Parameters Input Data TYPE: Assign/Delete ICRT (START/END:Incoming Route Number (External Route only) OGRT (START/END:Outgoing Route Number (External Route only)
Page 768: Carrn Continuous Assignment Of Alternative Route Restriction For Ndm
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CARRN: Continuous Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction for NDM 1. Functional Outline This command is used to continuously assign/delete the restriction data of relay connections between the outgoing route and the incoming route. The data assigned by this command is written in the Network Data Memory (NDM) of the Network Control Node (NCN), updating the NDM at each Local Node (LN).
Page 769: Catk Continuous Assignment Of Trunk Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CATK: Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data 1. Functional Outline This command can assign/delete many trunk data with consecutive numbers at once. 2. Parameters Type/KIND: Assign/Delete When ASSIGN is selected in the TYPE/KIND selection list box Input Data Route Number TK (START): First Trunk Number [1-768]...
Page 770 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands 5 = UNIT LEVEL GROUP 6 = UNIT GROUP LEVEL In this parameter, specify the size of increment between the consecutive trunk numbers assigned. See Note 1: the example below: Example: RESULT INPUT DATA TK(START)=1 A Trunk Number is assigned by increments of 2 TK(END)=21 A Trunk Number is deleted by increments of 2 STEP=2...
Page 771 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands When DELETE is selected in the TYPE/KIND selection list box Input Data Route Number TK(START): First Trunk Number [1-768] TK(END): Last Trunk Number [1-768] STEP: Trunk Count-up Step [1-10] Note 1 Buttons Execute: Delete the input data. Cancel: Cancel the deletion.
Page 772 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Details on Trunk Arrangement TYPE When assigning the consecutive trunk data by using CATK command, select the trunk arrangement type (1-6) in the TYPE parameter. The following are examples of accommodated 16 COT circuit cards: TYPE=1 (Level Group Unit) Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.
Page 773 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands TYPE=2 (Level Unit Group) Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order. Slot No. Level No. Group No. TYPE=3 (Group Unit Level) Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order. Slot No. 51 52 35 36 Level No.
Page 774 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands TYPE=4 (Group Level Unit) Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order. Slot No. 19 20 17 18 Level No. Group No. TYPE=5 (Unit Level Group) Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order Slot No.
Page 775 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands TYPE=6 (Unit Group Level) Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order. Slot No. 92 94 15 19 20 22 8 10 89 93 17 21 14 18 Level No. Group No. – 728 –...
Page 776: Cbcn Control Of Broadcasting For Ndm
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CBCN: Control of Broadcasting for NDM 1. Functional Outline This command is used to specify the destination of the NDM data broadcast from the NCN. This command is only available at the Network Control Node (NCN). 2.
Page 777: Cbcv Control Of Broadcasting For Vndm
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CBCV: Control of Broadcasting for VNDM 1. Functional Outline This command is used to broadcast the VNDM data from the C-VNDM to all of the L-VNDMs on the FCCS network. Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 This command is available only at the node that has the C-VNDM.
Page 778: Cbks Control Backup Station
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CBKS: Control Backup Station 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display information of terminals that are registered within the backup node. Also this command can reset those registered terminals. 2. Parameters <STATION> ALL ITEMS ARE SELECTED: Selects all IP terminals/SIP terminals that are registered to the node which CBKS command is used toward.
Page 779 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands <IP-BS> ALL ITEMS ARE SELECTED: Selects all IP-BSs that are registered to the node which CBKS com- mand is used toward. When “Selected terminal is reset” is clicked, all IP-BSs that are read out can be reset. TOTAL: Displays number of terminals that are read out.
Page 780: Cbnd Calculate Bandwidth Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CBND: Calculate Bandwidth Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to calculate bandwidth data. 2. Parameters Input data START LOC-ID: Start location ID (0-4095) END LOC-ID: End location ID (0-4095) Cycle: Observation Cycle (10-300 seconds) Start time: Start time of observation (Year/Month/Day/Hour/Minute/Second) DisplayRange:...
Page 781 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Exit: Exit the command. Clear: Clear the values. Recalc: Re-calculate bandwidth data. – 734 –...
Page 782: Ccse Change Of Common Signaling Channel Equipment
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CCSE: Change of Common Signaling Channel Equipment 1. Functional Outline This command is used to set/reset the make-busy state of CCH circuit card. 2. Parameters LENS: Line Equipment Number of CCH circuit card [five digits] MG=XX, UNIT=X, GROUP=XX LINK: Link Status [0-2] 0=Link Open...
Page 783: Cdbu Change Of Dch Backup
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CDBU: Change of Dch Backup 1. Functional Outline This command is used to execute the D-Channel route changeover, associated with the D-CHANNEL BACKUP-PRI feature (for AT&T/NT/N-ISDN2). 2. Parameters Input Data Module Group Number [00-07] Note CNT: Number of Dch Backup Route [1-32] Note Buttons...
Page 784: Cfcs Control Of Flash Card System
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CFCS: Control of Flash Card System 1. Functional Outline This command is used to perform SVI loading and checksum verification. 2. Parameters • Main Screen Input Data System: Select the system to be executed. System 0 System 1 Control Type: (Not used) SVI Load and Checksum verify: SVI Load and checksum are performed.
Page 785 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Input Data System: Select the system to be executed. System 0 System 1 Drive: Select the drive to be executed. Drive A Drive D Drive A/D Program Data Kind: Select the program data to be verified. Main Memory TCP/IP ACDP...
Page 786: Clpb Control Of Local Phone Book
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CLPB: Control of Local Phone Book 1. Function Outline This command enables deletion, copy and move of Local Phone book data. Phone book data (names and dial numbers) are not displayed during each operation. 2. Parameters Input Data Process Type Phone book data delete:...
Page 787 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Readout or input data are different depends on Parameter Type. The data in each Parameter Type are shown below. <Deleting data, Original data (for copy), Destination Copy, Original data (for move), Destination Move> • Parameter Type=STN is selected, read out or input the following data: Tenant Number STN: Physical Station Number (0-9, #, * [Maximum 6 digits])
Page 788: Cmnt Control Of Sr-Mgc Maintenance Data (Ldm)
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CMNT: Control of SR-MGC Maintenance Data (LDM) 1. Function Outline This command controls the Survivable Remote MGC (SR-MGC) in the remote office. SR-MGC Number, IP address and office name are specified by this command to recognize the SR-MGC allocated to the MGC in the main-office.
Page 789 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Enter the IP address of SR-MGC, not the default IP address but the actual IP address to be allocated to the target SR-MGC. In the case of two-unit SR-MGC, assign IP address of the SR T. Mode: The type of changeover and recovery is to be executed.
Page 790 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands The operation changeover between SV8500 MGC and SR-MGC is manually executed. Select the operation mode in Kind and Condition parameters, then click the Execute button. A dialog appears to confirm the changeover execution. Kind: Select either of the operations by radio button. •...
Page 791 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands White = No copy request Yellow = On standby (already requested to copy) Blue = Under copying Green = Succeeded in copying Red = Failed to copy Magenta = Backup MGC is ready with Location Diversity. When the Clear button is clicked, all the SR-MGC Numbers return to the state of No Copy Request.
Page 792 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands In the case of SIP/IP terminal, it is counted as “1” per terminal. In the case of network equipment except for MG-PRI (Proprietary Mode), it is counted as “1” per channel (MG-PRI (Proprietary Mode) is counted as “1” per terminal). Office Name [Maximum 20 characters] LMG Designation: PBI number is displayed when the office is configured by 16-IMG system.
Page 793: Cmod Change Of System Mode
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CMOD: Change of System Mode 1. Functional Outline This command is used to execute ACT/STBY change of the processor (CPU)/TSW and display the status of CPU/TSW/PLO/F-BUS. A System failure may occur if this command is used in an improper way. Pay close attention when oper- Note: ating this command.
Page 794 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands “ACT” or “ST-BY” is output in PIR field in the following conditions. However, this parameter does Note 4: not output connection status of BUS cables between PIRs and between PIR and TSWR. • At least one actual PIR is mounted by assignment of PIR mounting status (ASYDL, System 1, Index 512- 513) and Unit status (ASYDL, System 1, Index 1026-1027).
Page 795 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands A Side: Status of F-BUS in A Side • 0=Not Mount • 1=ACT • 3=MB B Side: Status of F-BUS in B Side • 0=Not Mount • 1=ACT • 3=MB – 748 –...
Page 796: Cmwl Control Message Waiting Lamp
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CMWL: Control Message Waiting Lamp 1. Functional Outline This command indicates ON/OFF status and controls the Message Waiting Lamp ON/OFF (MW Lamp) at the station. If the station is a Dterm, this command can also control Message Waiting Display on the Dterm. 2.
Page 797: Cmwl_T Control Message Waiting Lamps – Telephone Number
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CMWL_T: Control Message Waiting Lamps – Telephone Number 1. Functional Outline This command is used to control/display the Message Waiting Lamp’s ON/OFF status, by using Telephone numbers. When the station is a Dterm, this command can also be used to control the Message Waiting Lamp Display.
Page 798 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Set: Execute the assigned MW lamp control. Exit: Exit this command. – 751 –...
Page 799: Cossl Control Of Sip Server Data For Ldm
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands COSSL:Control of SIP Server Data for LDM 1. Functional Outline This command can display the link status of SP. Use COSSL for stand-alone system or COSSN in the FCCS network. 2. Parameters Input Data <Channel Status> SIP Server ID: ID of SP [1-127] CNT Specified Type: Select the way to specify the CNT Individual: Execute the reset transaction for Specified individual CNT...
Page 800 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Control: Status of Control Channel ST-B1: Status of Speech Channel (ST-B1) ST-B2: Status of Speech Channel (ST-B2) ST-B3: Status of Speech Channel (ST-B3) PH LENS: Accommodation of PH Buttons Get: Retrieve the information. Exit: Exit this command. Execute: Execute the reset transaction.
Page 801 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Only when system ID is specified in SIP Server ID and the system is redundant, this button is displayed. Note 1: Only when the SP is in Active mode and another SP is in Standby mode, system changeover can be ex- Note 2: ecuted.
Page 802: Cossn Control Of Sip Server Data For Ndm
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands COSSN:Control of SIP Server Data for NDM 1. Functional Outline This command can display the link status of SP. Use COSSL for stand-alone system or COSSN in the FCCS network. 2. Parameters Input Data <SIP Server Status> FPC: Fusion Point Code [1-253] <Channel Status>...
Page 803 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands <Channel Status> CNT: Count LENS: Equipment Number Control: Status of Control Channel ST-B1: Status of Speech Channel (ST-B1) ST-B2: Status of Speech Channel (ST-B2) ST-B3: Status of Speech Channel (ST-B3) PH LENS: Accommodation of PH Buttons Get: Retrieve the information.
Page 804 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands On Single SP, reset can be executed. Note 2: When reset transaction is executing, the remaining time until Time-out is displayed, if reset transaction Note 3: is not completed within 3 minutes, the task will be stopped with displaying “Time-out”. SP mode change: Execute forcible system changeover between Active-side SP and Standby-side Note 1:...
Page 805: Cpbkn Continuous Assignment Of System Phone Book For Ndm
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CPBKN:Continuous Assignment of System Phone Book for NDM 1. Functional Outline This command is used to assign/delete System Phone Book data in a lump (Batch Assignment) by drawing up text format database file. The data assigned by this command is written in the Network Data Memory (NDM) of the Network Control Node (NCN), updating the NDM at each Local Node (LN).
Page 806 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Output Data RESULT field: F_OK: Database file is normal. (Execute button is active.) F_ERR: Database file error occurs. (Execute button is not active. Data assignment is not available.) The error occurs when database file is read out because of the following causes. Input Data Cause of Error INDEX...
Page 807 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Database File for Batch Assignment To draw up the database for System Phone Book data, the database file should be made under conditions below. Sample Format of Database File CPBKN_DATAFILE [CR+LF] ;Database File for Batch Assignment ;INDEX RESULT TN NAME DC_01...
Page 808 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands INDEX RESULT NAME DC_01 - DC_20 • To input NAME, do not use characters and marks that cannot be used by PCPro. If input, error will occur. The following shows available characters and marks for PCPro. A-Z, a-z, 0-9, !, ?, -, +, %, &, /, (,), =, ., ,, :, ", ', ;, *, #, @, [, ], SP (blank space) è, é...
Page 809 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands When desired language does not exist in the pull down menu: Note: Open Regional and Language Options in Control Panel, click the check box of area that includes the location for desired input language in Code page conversion tables field on Advanced tab. <To Open and Save Database File through Microsoft Office Excel>...
Page 810 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands “CPBKN_DATA.txt” is used here for file name of the database as an example. Note: STEP 4 The database file is saved. STEP 5 Open the database file with the text editor and go through the content. When quotation marks (“) and colons (,) are used in NAME field, they may be enclosed in quotation Note: marks on the database.
Page 811: Cpcp Control Of Pc Port
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CPCP: Control of PC Port 1. Functional Outline This command is used when the maintenance personnel disconnects/connects the PC port of DtermIP from/to the network. 2. Parameters Input Data <For the data readout> Kind of Specification: Select one of the following items: All Data: Specifies all the DtermIP’s PC ports.
Page 812 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands <For the execution of the process> PC Port Control: Select either “Connection” or “Disconnection”. <Others> All Select: Mark the checkbox when selecting all data in the list. Auto Scroll: By marking the checkbox, the data in the list is automatically scrolled to the end.
Page 813: Cprs Controlled Alternate Prscs
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CPRS: Controlled Alternate PRSCs 1. Functional Outline This command is necessary for the Controlled Alternate PRSCs function. It either selects the class used between two priority restriction classes (Normal or Urgent), or indicates the class used. This command is allowed only when Bit1 of SYS 1, INDEX 59 is “1”...
Page 814: Cscl Continuous Change Of Station Class
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CSCL: Continuous Change of Station Class 1. Functional Outline This command can change the station class information (TEC, RSC, SFC) for a group of stations by specifying the range of the station number. 2. Parameters Input Data Tenant Number STN(START): First Station Number [0-9, #, * (maximum six digits)]...
Page 815 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands 28-31=Not used If changing all classes of all specified stations, enter “**” for this parameter. Note 3: Buttons Execute: Make the input data valid. Cancel: Cancel the input data. Exit: Exit this command. Output Data STN: Station Number STATUS: Data Entry Result...
Page 816: Cspal Continuous Delete Of Special Access Code For Ldm
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CSPAL:Continuous Delete of Special Access Code for LDM 1. Functional Outline This command collectively lists/deletes the special access code data (LDM) assigned by the ASPAL command. During activating this command, be sure not to run any other commands. Note 1: Note 2: To delete the data collectively, first readout the registered data by either of the following ways:...
Page 817 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands 2. Parameters CSV File File Name: Read out CSV file name is displayed. File Read button When using the saved CSV file already having got the registered data, read the CSV file out on PCPro. Click File Read button to open File Open dialog box, and then specify the target CSV file. File Write button The data listed on the Data field is saved as a CSV file on PCPro.
Page 818 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands NND1: Necessary Digit for Speed Calling FPC: Fusion Point Code STATE: Hotel Service Code NO1: Kind of Assignment Number NO2: Kind of Assignment Number KIND: Kind of Function PNO: Pattern Number for AOSP command A/G: Admin/Guest LGRT: Logical Route Number 2nd DT:...
Page 819: Cspan Continuous Delete Of Special Access Code For Ndm
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CSPAN:Continuous Delete of Special Access Code for NDM 1. Functional Outline This command collectively lists/deletes the special access code data (NDM) assigned by the ASPAN command. During activating this command, be sure not to run any other commands. Note 1: Note 2: To delete the data collectively, first readout the registered data by either of the following ways:...
Page 820 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands • FCCS RUNNING TIME NUMBER OF DATA ENTRY 160 seconds 1,000 1,630 seconds 10,000 16,300 seconds • FCCS over IP (P2P) RUNNING TIME NUMBER OF DATA ENTRY 160 seconds 1,000 1,630 seconds 10,000 16,300 seconds • FCCS with FCH card RUNNING TIME NUMBER OF DATA ENTRY 160 seconds...
Page 821 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Select ALL TYPE or RANGE TYPE in the drop-down list to set the range of registered data to be read out and listed in Data field. • ALL TYPE: All the registered data is to be listed. •...
Page 822 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands SUB: Sub Address Dialing SKIP: Skip Digits Tenant Number EQP: Announcement Equipment Number LGRT1~15: External Logical Route Number STATUS: Deletion result, error message, and error message for abnormal parameter value are dis- played. Deletion target data can be selected individually by the CNT check box. Note 1: –...
Page 823: Cstn Continuous Change Of Station Number
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CSTN: Continuous Change of Station Number 1. Functional Outline This command can change the consecutive station numbers for a group of stations by specifying the station number range. 2. Parameters Input Data TN: Tenant Number OLD STN(START): First Station Number before change [0-9, #, * (maximum six digits)] Note OLD STN(END): Last Station Number before change [0-9, #, * (maximum six digits)] Note...
Page 824: Dcbd Display Of Call Block Entry Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DCBD: Display of Call Block Entry Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the following Call Block data, assigned to a station: • Number of station/trunk whose call is to be blocked (in the remainder of this page, denoted as Restriction Number) •...
Page 825 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Output Data CNT:Registered Restriction Numbers in total (1-5) DC:Each Restriction Number •When Physical Station Number is registered (maximum six digits) •When Telephone Number is registered (maximum 16 digits) •When Trunk Call Number is registered (maximum 32 digits) –...
Page 826: Dcen Display Of Connection Trunk Lens Data For Ldm
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DCEN: Display of Connection Trunk LENS Data for LDM 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the registered connection trunk/route data by designating LENS. 2. Parameters Input Data C_LENS: Line Equipment Number [six digits] Output Data C_RT: Connection Route Number [1-1023]...
Page 827: Dcon Display Of Connection Status
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DCON: Display of Connection Status 1. Functional Outline This command displays the connection status of the station and trunks. If the specified station or trunk is busy, the connected party is displayed. The activation of this command does not affect calls in progress. Encryption status for voice data is displayed in SEC as follows: O: encrypted, X: not encrypted, blank: the system or the terminal is not available for encryption.
Page 828 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands The following shows the relationship between SEC value and encryption on a connection pattern basis. Figure 7-6 The Relationship between SEC value and Encryption [1] non-IP terminal and non-IP terminal SEC = blank Encryption Not Provided Terminal specified by DCON [2] IP terminal and IP terminal (SV8500: encryption is valid)
Page 829: Ddmo Display Of Data Memory Occupancy
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DDMO: Display of Data Memory Occupancy 1. Function Outline This command displays the data memory occupancy (used area size, free area size, maximum area size, and usage rate of data memory). When there are unassigned memory blocks, their sizes are not to be displayed. Note: 2.
Page 830: Debug General Purpose Debug Function
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DEBUG:General Purpose Debug Function 1. Functional Outline This command is used to set necessary data for outputting debug information and displaying it on terminals connected with LAN. 2. Parameters Input data SP/LMG SP: System Processor <Trigger> CONTENTS TRIGGER NUMBER TCP/IP Module Information...
Page 831 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands CONTENTS TRIGGER NUMBER Phone Book Error Log The other trigger numbers will be added as appropriate. Note: <Remote Host> Store debug info inside MGC (output later) : If not checked, debug information is stored into main memory only. If checked, the information is stored into main memory and designated remote host.
Page 832 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands <TCP/IP> Output Device None Fault printer: Debug information is output to fault printer. IO Port: IO port of fault printer [1-7] Remote Host: Debug information is output to a remote host. TCP/IP Debug information output None: Suspend TCP/IP trace data. Warnings: Only warning messages are output.
Page 833 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Protocol Usage Port No. 60001 60010 SMDR 60020 60030 60040 60050 60060 60070 CS Report 60090 Internal PHD 60110 Receive Health Check between MGC and SR-MGC (Server) 60120 Send Health Check between MGC and SR-MGC (Client) 60130 Internal PHE 60140...
Page 834 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Delete: Delete items specified. Apply: Apply a change to the system. Cancel: Close the window. <Reference> How to Capture Call Statistics using DEBUG Command To capture Call Statistics on the local host in the PCPro session enter DEBUG command (or select it from the Tool folder).
Page 835 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands From the Unchosen Trigger area, select item 3 (Notification of IP station RTP statistics information). Press Set button. Item 3 is transferred to the Chosen Trigger area. Press Close button. – 788 –...
Page 836 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Item 3 is displayed in the Setting Trigger area. Select Remote Host window. Check Send Remote Host box. – 789 –...
Page 837 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands To capture Call Statistics on the local host, check Receive on the PCPro box. Local PC IP Address will appear automatically in the IP Address field as well as Port Number (UDP) 40000. Press Apply button and Open window button.
Page 838: Dfln Display Up Of Location Free Numbering
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DFLN: Display Up of Location Free Numbering 1. Functional Outline This command is used to check the assigned data of Location Free Numbering Service. When this command is activated, the assigned data are displayed on a basis of each designated station number. 2.
Page 839: Dftd Display Of System Message Details
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DFTD: Display of System Message Details 1. Functional Outline This command is necessary to print the system messages detected by Fault Diagnostic programs. When the fault scanning (Scanning SV8500) is effective, PCPro can scan SV8500 status by polling every 20 seconds, (default setting is effective.) If the SV8500 has faults, this command executes automatically.
Page 840: Dhdf Display Of Hd File Information
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DHDF: Display of HD File Information 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display or delete the Program/Office Data files preserved on the specified SV8500 Hard Disk. 2. Parameters Input Data System: 0: System 0 1: System 1 Data: 11 - Data Memory Files (DM)
Page 841 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands 35 - SIP Terminal Call Transfer 36 - SPD Name Data 37 - Mobility Access Data 38 - Day/Night Data 39 - Local Phone book Data 40 - Soft Switch Data LP No.: Designate the LP number. (Required when 12, 13, 18, 19, 23, 26, 27, 28 or 37 is selected in the Data parameter.) Drive Select: Designate the Drive of HDD.
Page 842: Dicbd Display Of Individual Call Block Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DICBD: Display of Individual Call Block Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the information of Individual Call Block Data. 2. Parameters Input Data TYPE: Select the item to input data. 1: UGN/TELN 2: FPC/TN/STN 3: FPC/LENS When “1: UGN/TELN”...
Page 843 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Get: Get the Individual Call Block Data. Exit: Exit this command. – 796 –...
Page 844: Dimg Display Information Of Media Gateway
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DIMG: Display Information of Media Gateway 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the information of the Media Gateway that is managed by SV8500 (PHI). 2. Parameters Input Data View Type: Select the item to be displayed. Media Gateway Information: Information of Media Gateway belonging to SV8500.
Page 845: Dipi Display Ip Equipment Information
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DIPI: Display IP equipment Information 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the information of IP terminals. Information can be displayed by pressing the Execute button. Information displayed can be output to the CSV file by pressing the CSV File Output button. 2.
Page 846 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands B2BUA-SIP GW-32ch: Back-to-Back User Agent (32 channels) Multi-Function Server Voice Server: VS-32 Multi Protocol Handler: MPH SIP Multi-Function Telephone: SIP Multi-Function Telephone SIP Soft-Phone: SIP Multi-Function Softphone SIP-VPS: IP-UMS SIP Media Gateway ISDN Trunk (BRI) [SIP]: MG(BRI) ISDN Trunk (PRI 1.5M) [SIP]: MG(PRI) ISDN Trunk (PRI 2M) [SIP]: MG(PRI) MG(6COT) [SIP]: MG(6COT)
Page 847 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands UGN(NDM): User Group Number (NDM) TELN(NDM): Telephone Number (NDM) UGN(LDM): User Group Number (LDM) TELN(LDM): Telephone Number (LDM) RT: Route Number TK: Trunk Number ISDN STATUS: Line Status at this time MODE: Operation mode used at this time PCN: PHS Community Number ERN: Calling Area Number (1-32) GRN: Group Number (1-8)
Page 848: Disd Display Of Ip Station Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DISD: Display of IP Station Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the Registration status of IP Stations. This command is usually used to check the Registration status of IP Stations before the replacement of PH circuit card. Assign Station Number or LENS of PH, then click the Get button to display the status of the appropriate Note: IP Stations in Detail data list.
Page 849 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands TELN: Enter Telephone Number Note 2 This parameter is valid when “TelephoneNumber (NDM)/(LDM)” is selected as Kind of Station. Note 2: KIND: Kind of Release Note 3 • Soft Reset • PH Control Data Clear and Soft Reset •...
Page 850 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands VS32 (SIP) VS-32 (SIP) X: Available to operate on this parameter NA: Not available to operate on this parameter -: Not used When ViewType = PH Control: PH LENS: Specify the first Group of PH accommodated Location. PH TYPE: Type of Circuit Card (Display only) •...
Page 851 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands GKID: Identifier of Gate Keeper (1-255) GKIP: IP address of Gate Keeper (Display only) When ViewType = Voice Server: VS-ID: MAC address of Voice Server KIND: Kind of Release Note 5 • Soft Reset • PH Control Data Clear and Soft Reset •...
Page 852 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands MPH LENS: Line Equipment Number of MPH MPH ID: Identifier of MPH When ViewType = PH Control: LENS: Line Equipment Number FPC: Fusion Point Code Status: Status of the terminal IP: IP address MAC: MAC address SEC: Encryption status for voice data TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number...
Page 853 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number UGN (NDM): User Group Number TELN (NDM): Telephone Number UGN (LDM): User Group Number TELN (LDM): Telephone Number PH LENS: Line Equipment Number of PH Status: Status of the terminal When ViewType = Voice Server: LENS: Line Equipment Number FPC: Fusion Point Code...
Page 854 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands UGN (LDM): User Group Number TELN (LDM): Telephone Number PH LENS: Line Equipment Number of PH Status: Status of the terminal When ViewType = MPH: PH TYPE: Kind of PH LENS: Line Equipment Number REGMAX: Capacity of Registration MGC PORT: Control Signal Port for TP TERM PORT: Control Signal Port for IP Equipment –...
Page 855: Disi Display Of Ip Statistics Information
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DISI: Display of IP Statistics Information 1. Functional Outline This command is used to output the statistic information corresponding to the LENS data of the designated IPELC or IPTRK card. 2. Parameters Input Data TYPE: Type of IPTRK Control [1-8] Select the type from combo box;...
Page 856 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands If any wrong data is input, error message “SP H/I Error (Error Code 0x0D05)” is displayed. Note: Output Data (a) When 1: Internal Ether Traffic Data of IP Trunk Read is selected; Frequency of: Memory Error (CSR0) Missed Frame (CSR0) Collision Error Send Timeout...
Page 857 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands (b) When 2: External Ether Traffic Data of IP Trunk Read is selected; Frequency of: Memory Error (CSR0) Collision Error Send Timeout Send Delay Retry Once (Send Error) Retry More than Once (Send Error) FIFO Underflow Framing Error RMDI-STP bit Error IP Packet (Receive Total)
Page 858 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Datagram (Receive Total) UDP Packet (Receive Failure) Datagram (Send Total) Port Number and the Frequency of Status Mismatch (c) When 3: Signal Control Traffic Data of IP Trunk Read is selected; Target IP Address Target Port Number Self IP Address Self Port Number Average Delay Time of TCP Packet (Send)
Page 859 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands (e) When 5: IP Trunk Status Read is selected; Target IP Address Target Port Number Self Port Number Active Mode Connect Mode Time of Connection Lost (minute) Connection Status (f) When 6: Terminal Data of IPELC Read is selected; IP Address Jitter Buffer Minimum (x 10 milliseconds) Jitter Buffer Maximum (x 10 milliseconds)
Page 860 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands The number of packets to be sent out or received is displayed via channel 0 to 31 on PROTIMS and RTP. – 813 –...
Page 861: Diss Display Of Program Issue
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DISS: Display of Program Issue 1. Functional Outline This command is used to output program information in the main memory and the Port Microprocessor (PM) memory into a printer and PCPro: The program information includes Version, Issue No., Date, etc. DISS command should be run during low traffic only.
Page 862: Dlen Display Of Lens Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DLEN: Display of LENS Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used display the data (station data or trunk data) assigned for a designated LEN. For Hotel system, Room Class and Floor Service Data [Annex (ANX), Ground/Underground (G), Floor (FLR)] displays also.
Page 863 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands 0=Ground 1=Underground FLR: Floor (1-127) Internal Route Number (See Table 7-2.) Table 7-2 Internal Route Number Explanation DATA MEANING DATA MEANING Attendant Console Originating Register Trunk Incoming Register Trunk MF Receiver Sender Trunk DP/PB PB Receiver for Automated Attendant Service Not used Three-Way Conference Trunk 910, 911...
Page 864: Dlsl Display Of Lockout Station - Lens
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DLSL: Display of Lockout Station - LENS 1. Functional Outline This command is used to print the LENS of stations in lockout state. 2. Parameters Input data Type: Type of Printout (1-3) 1=Printout of all LEN in lockout 2=Printout of locked out LEN in the designated Module Group 3=Printout of locked out LEN in the designated Unit Module Group Number...
Page 865: Dlss Display Of Lockout Station - Number
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DLSS: Display of Lockout Station - Number 1. Functional Outline This command is used to print the stations in lockout state by station number. 2. Parameters Input data Type: Type of Printout (1-3) 1=Printout of all lockout stations 2=Printout of lockout stations by tenant 3=Printout of lockout stations within a specified range of station number.
Page 866: Dlss_T Display Of Lock Out Station – Number – Telephone Number
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DLSS_T: Display of Lock Out Station – Number – Telephone Number 1. Functional Outline This command is used to print out stations in lockout state, by using Telephone Numbers. This command is only available at NCN (for FCCS network). 2.
Page 867: Dltel Display Of Telephone Number From Lens For Ldm
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DLTEL: Display of Telephone Number from LENS for LDM 1. Functional Outline This command, available at each Local Node (LN), is used to display the Telephone Number or other station data by designating a specific LEN. 2.
Page 868: Dntel Display Of Telephone Number From Lens For Ndm
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DNTEL: Display of Telephone Number from LENS for NDM 1. Functional Outline This command, available at Network Control Node (NCN) only, is used to display the Telephone Number or other station data by designating a specific FPC and LEN. 2.
Page 869: Dphl Display Of Phl Package Status
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DPHL: Display of PHL Package Status 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the status of PHL. 2. Parameters Output Data PKG TYPE: Internal PHI Internal PHD Internal PHE LENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits) REGMAX: Registration Maximum REGCNT:...
Page 870: Dpkg Display Of Setting Port Package
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DPKG: Display of Setting Port Package 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the circuit card name accommodated in each Group of a specific UNIT. When using this command, make sure that each circuit card’s related database file has already been in- Note: stalled to the PCPro.
Page 871: Dpsw Display Package Switch Status
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DPSW: Display Package Switch Status 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the following information on a Line/Trunk or Control circuit card: When PCPro is in On-line Mode (=connected to the system) • Current status of each switch •...
Page 872 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands ACT/STBY: ACT/STBY information Note 2 0=ACT l=STBY 2=Not used IOC Card Number [0/1] Note 2 This parameter may appear when Control Package is selected in the TYPE parameter. Note 2: Buttons Get: View the display data. Next Page: View the next page data (when next page exists).
Page 873: Dptr Display Of Capacity / License
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DPTR: Display of Capacity / License 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the line capacity of the system and the license number of the Soft Phones. Also license registration information such as the number of registered licenses and IP terminals is displayed for each IP terminal type.
Page 874: Dstn Display Of Station Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DSTN: Display of Station Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the registered Station Data corresponding to the designated Tenant and Station Number. In addition, the information of Hot Line, Dterm Key Layout, Hunting, and Call Pickup, etc., can also be displayed as the data related to the designated stations.
Page 875 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands LENS: Line Equipment Number (six digits) TEC: Telephone Equipment Class [1-31] l=DP (10pps) 2=PB 3=DP/PB 4=DP (20pps) 5-11=Not used 12=Dterm 13=Data Terminal via Dterm 14=Hot Line 15=CAS Line 16=Data Terminal via Data Module 17=Not used 18=Virtual Line Appearance (for Dterm Multi-Line) 19-22=Not used 23=ISDN Terminal 24-26=Not used...
Page 876: Dteln Display Of Telephone Number Data For Ndm
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTELN: Display of Telephone Number Data for NDM 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the registered station data corresponding to a specified User Group Number (UGN) and Telephone Number (TELN). The following data related to the Number Group can be displayed by clicking the selection button for each data.
Page 877 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Selection Button CPGN: Call Pickup Group (NDM) CPEN: Call Pickup Expand Group (NDM) SHUN: Station Hunting Group-UCD (NDM) SHCN: Station Hunting Group-Circular (NDM) HLSN: Hot Line Station (NDM) SHPN: Station Hunting Group-Pilot (NDM) KYD: Key Data for Dterm –...
Page 878: Dtf101 Display Of Terminal Traffic Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF101: Display of Terminal Traffic Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=1 (Terminal Traffic) assigned by the ATRF command. 2. Parameters Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101 Route Traffic-DTF102 Station Peg Count-DTF103 Attendant Peg Count-DTF104...
Page 879: Dtf102 Display Of Route Traffic Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF102: Display of Route Traffic Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=2 (Route Traffic) assigned by the ATRF command. 2. Parameters Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101 Route Traffic-DTF102 Station Peg Count-DTF103 Attendant Peg Count-DTF104...
Page 880: Dtf103 Display Of Station Peg Count Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF103: Display of Station Peg Count Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=3 (Station Peg Count) assigned by the ATRF command. 2. Parameters Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101 Route Traffic-DTF102 Station Peg Count-DTF103...
Page 881: Dtf104 Display Of Attendant Peg Count Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF104: Display of Attendant Peg Count Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=4 (ATT Peg Count) assigned by the ATRF command. 2. Parameters Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101 Route Traffic-DTF102 Station Peg Count-DTF103...
Page 882: Dtf105 Display Of Route Peg Count Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF105: Display of Route Peg Count Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=5 (Route Peg Count) assigned by the ATRF command. 2. Parameters Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101 Route Traffic-DTF102 Station Peg Count-DTF103...
Page 883: Dtf201 Display Of Service Peg Count Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF201: Display of Service Peg Count Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=6 (Service Peg Count) assigned by the ATRF command. 2. Parameters Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101 Route Traffic-DTF102 Station Peg Count-DTF103...
Page 884: Dtf301 Display Of Ucd Route Peg Count Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF301: Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=8 (UCD Route Peg Count) assigned by the ATRF command. 2. Parameters Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101 Route Traffic-DTF102...
Page 885: Dtf302 Display Of Ucd Group Peg Count Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF302: Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=9 (UCD Group Peg Count) assigned by the ATRF command. 2. Parameters Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101 Route Traffic-DTF102...
Page 886: Dtf303 Display Of Ucd Station Peg Count Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF303: Display of UCD Station Peg Count Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=10 (UCD Station Peg Count) assigned by the ATRF command. 2. Parameters Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101 Route Traffic-DTF102...
Page 887: Dtf501 Display Of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF501: Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=15 (ATT Answering Peg Count) assigned by the ATRF command. 2. Parameters Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101 Route Traffic-DTF102...
Page 888: Dtf601 Display Of Connection Route Peg Count Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF601: Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=18 (Connection Route Peg Count) assigned by the ATRF command. 2. Parameters Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101 Route Traffic-DTF102...
Page 889: Dtf602 Display Of Connection Route Traffic Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF602: Display of Connection Route Traffic Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=19 (Connection Route Traffic) assigned by the ATRF command. 2. Parameters Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101 Route Traffic-DTF102 Station Peg Count-DTF103...
Page 890: Dtf701 Display Of Ip Service Peg Count Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF701: Display of IP Service Peg Count Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=20 (IP Service Peg Count) assigned by the ATRF command. 2. Parameters Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101 Route Traffic-DTF102...
Page 891: Dtf702 Display Of Ip Service Traffic Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF702: Display of IP Service Traffic Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=21(IP Service Traffic) assigned by the ATRF command. 2. Parameters Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101 Route Traffic-DTF102 Station Peg Count-DTF103...
Page 892: Dtf801 Display Of Sip Service Peg Count Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF801: Display of SIP Service Peg Count Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=22(SIP Service Peg Count) assigned by the ATRF command. 2. Parameters Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101 Route Traffic-DTF102 Station Peg Count-DTF103...
Page 893: Dtf101N Display Of Terminal Traffic Data For Fccs Network
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF101N: Display of Terminal Traffic Data for FCCS Network 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=1 (Terminal Traffic) assigned by the ATRFN command. 2. Parameters Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101N Route Traffic-DTF102N Station Peg Count-DTF103N...
Page 894: Dtf102N Display Of Route Traffic Data For Fccs Network
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF102N: Display of Route Traffic Data for FCCS Network 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=2 (Route Traffic) assigned by the ATRFN command. 2. Parameters Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101N Route Traffic-DTF102N Station Peg Count-DTF103N...
Page 895: Dtf103N Display Of Station Peg Count Data For Fccs Network
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF103N: Display of Station Peg Count Data for FCCS Network 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=3 (Station Peg Count) assigned by the ATRFN command. 2. Parameters Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101N Route Traffic-DTF102N...
Page 896: Dtf104N Display Of Attendant Peg Count Data For Fccs Network
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF104N: Display of Attendant Peg Count Data for FCCS Network 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=4 (ATT Peg Count) assigned by the ATRFN command. 2. Parameters Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101N Route Traffic-DTF102N...
Page 897: Dtf105N Display Of Route Peg Count Data For Fccs Network
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF105N: Display of Route Peg Count Data for FCCS Network 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=5 (Route Peg Count) assigned by the ATRFN command. 2. Parameters Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101N Route Traffic-DTF102N...
Page 898: Dtf201N Display Of Service Peg Count Data For Fccs Network
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF201N: Display of Service Peg Count Data for FCCS Network 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=6 (Service Peg Count) assigned by the ATRFN command. 2. Parameters Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101N Route Traffic-DTF102N...
Page 899: Dtf301N Display Of Ucd Route Peg Count Data For Fccs Network
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF301N: Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data for FCCS Network 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=8 (UCD Route Peg Count) assigned by the ATRFN command. 2.
Page 900: Dtf302N Display Of Ucd Group Peg Count Data For Fccs Network
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF302N: Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data for FCCS Network 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=9 (UCD Group Peg Count) assigned by the ATRFN command. 2.
Page 901: Dtf303N Display Of Ucd Station Peg Count Data For Fccs Network
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF303N: Display of UCD Station Peg Count Data for FCCS Network 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=10 (UCD Station Peg Count) assigned by the ATRFN command. 2.
Page 902: Dtf501N Display Of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data For Fccs Network
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF501N: Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data for FCCS Network 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=15 (ATT Answering Peg Count) assigned by the ATRFN command. 2.
Page 903: Dtf601N Display Of Connection Route Peg Count Data For Fccs Network
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF601N: Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data for FCCS Network 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=18 (Connection Route Peg Count) assigned by the ATRFN command. 2.
Page 904: Dtf602N Display Of Connection Route Traffic Data For Fccs Network
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands DTF602N: Display of Connection Route Traffic Data for FCCS Network 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=19 (Connection Route Traffic) assigned by the ATRFN command. 2. Parameters Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101N Route Traffic-DTF102N...
Page 905: Flinst File Install
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands FLINST: File Install 1. Functional Outline This command is used to install the DPSW-dedicated database files to your PCPro. This command is necessary to provide each circuit card’s various information (such as circuit card name, equipped switch names, etc.) when your system uses the DPSW/DPKG command.
Page 906: Hdfp Hdd Format Of Sv8500
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands HDFP: HDD Format of SV8500 1. Functional Outline This command is used to format the Flash card of SV8500. 2. Parameters Input Data (Selection by check) System 0: HDD of System 0 System 1: HDD of System 1 Buttons Execute: Execute the formatting.
Page 907: Ipan Display Of Ip Machine Status Display Function
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands IPAN: Display of IP machine status display function 1. Functional Outline This command is used to analyze the connection status between MGC and IP devices; executing ping test, verifying the station data, and displaying IP equipment information. (a) Item to be displayed on “Note”...
Page 908 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands [Output Data] System-0 operating status Note 1 System-1 operating status Note 1 System-Act IP address Note 2 System-0 IP address Note 2 Note 3 System-1 IP address Note 2 Note 3 Subnet Mask (default: 255.255.0.0) Note 2 Information of LAN2 will be displayed.
Page 909 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Get:Reads out and displays the connected IP device data. Ping Execute:Executes ping test to verify that a particular IP address exists and can accept request, and to see how long it takes to get response. Ping test is executed to the IP address marked in the check box on the list.
Page 910 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Analog MC • IPCS/IPZT • Gateway Gate Keeper SIP Server • IPVPS • Media Gateway ISDN Trunk (BRI) ISDN Trunk (PRI 1.5M) ISDN Trunk (PRI 2M) SIP-MG MG (COT) MC-MG (7COT) MG (6COT) B2BUA-SIP GW-4ch B2BUA-SIP GW-32ch •...
Page 911 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands • Other SIP Station • SIP Media Converter 8MC [SIP] To display DtermSP30 used as ACD agent position, select Soft Phone (SP20). Note 5: • Station • “Station Kind” Field • Station Number Specify the range of Tenant Number in the START TN and END TN Specify the range of Station Number in the START STN and END TN •...
Page 912 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Click the “Version detailed display” button to display the detail firmware information of the selected PH Note: card on the list. • SIP Server Specify the SIP Server ID [1-255]. • Specify the Multi-Protocol Handler ID[1-4095] [Output Data] Items to be displayed will vary depending on the View Type chosen.
Page 913 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Equipment Station Trunk IPCS/IPZT Gatekeeper PH Control SIP Server Kind CSN/ZTN CSN/ZTN CSN/ZTN GKID GKID GKID GKID SIP Server ID SIP Server ID SIP Server ID SIP Server ID MPH LENS MPH LENS MPH LENS MPH ID MPH ID MPH ID PHIN...
Page 914 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Meanings of each item is shown below: Equipment Name of the equipment. Group Number Name Kind of channel for VS-32. Gatekeeper ID IP CH KIND GKID IP Address IP Address SIP Server ID SIP Server ID LOC-ID Location ID MPH LENS...
Page 915 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands <Package tab> [Input Data] Specify the range of LENS in the START PH LENS and END PH LENS [five digits]. [Output Data] PH LENS IP Address PH Type: PHA, PHE, PHD, PHC, IPPAD, PHI, Internal PHE, Internal PHD, Internal PHC, Internal PHI REGMAX: The maximum number of registration REG CNT: The number of terminals under the registration of the corresponding PH card LOGIN CNT: The number of terminals logging in to the MGC...
Page 916 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands <PHC Point Code tab> [Input Data] Specify the range of Point Code in the START Remote PC and END Remote PC [1-16367]. [Output Data] Office: Self office / Destination office PC: Point Code of the office IP Address PH LENS: LENS of the PHC card in the self office (displayed for self office only) Ping result (system-0)
Page 917 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands <IP Address Input tab> [Input Data] Set Type: Input/File • When Input is selected: IP Address Input Type When Individual is selected: IP Address: Enter the target IP address. When Collective is selected: Enter the range of IP addresses in the START IP Address and END IP Address boxes. •...
Page 918 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands <STN Verify tab> [Input Data] Verify Type: File Memory / File File Verify Key Data: Station Number / Telephone Number (NDM) / Telephone Number (LDM) File 1: Select the CSV file clicking the “Reference” button. File only). File 2: Select the CSV file clicking the “Reference”...
Page 919 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands <Registration Log tab> [Input Data] LENS Input Type: All / Collective Specify the range of LENS in the START and END box when Collective is selected. • Equipment kind [Registration/License Capacity] • Terminal DtermIP Soft Phone (SP20) Inaset Soft Phone (SP21) Soft Phone (SP30)
Page 920 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands TK: Trunk Number ISDN STATUS: Line Status MODE: Operation mode PCN: PHS Community Number ERN: Calling Area Number GRN: Group Number CSN/ZTN: IP-BS Number GKID: Gatekeeper ID SIP Server ID MPH LENS: MPH Accommodation Location Information (LENS) MPH ID PHIN: Virtual Accommodation Location PH LENS: Accommodation Location Information of PH...
Page 921: Mbct Make-Busy Of Connection Trunk For Ldm
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands MBCT: Make-Busy of Connection Trunk for LDM 1. Functional Outline This command is used to set/reset the make-busy state of a connection trunk. 2. Parameters Input Data C_RT: Connection Route Number [1-1023] C_TK: Trunk Number [1-4095] Make-Busy Information [0-1] 0=Make Idle 1=Make Busy (Outgoing)
Page 922: Mbctc Make-Busy Of Connection Trunk-Continuous For Ldm
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands MBCTC:Make-Busy of Connection Trunk-Continuous for LDM 1. Functional Outline This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of connection trunks. By using this command, multiple trunks can be placed into IDLE/BUSY state simultaneously per a Connection route designated in C_TK parameter.
Page 923: Mble Make-Busy Of Lens
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands MBLE: Make-Busy of LENS 1. Functional Outline This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of Line Equipment Numbers (LENS). 2. Parameters Input data LENS Line Equipment Number Make-Busy Information [0-1] 0=Make Idle 1=Make Busy –...
Page 924: Mbph Make Busy Of Phl Package For Ldm
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands MBPH: Make Busy of PHL Package for LDM 1. Functional Outline This command is used to set the make-busy state of the PHL circuit card due to a card replacement. Executing this command transfers the terminals belonging to the PHL circuit card to another PHL card which has unused ports.
Page 925 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Output data After clicking “Get” button, the latest status is displayed at ten second intervals. PKG TYPE: Circuit Card Name STN: Physical Station Number TELN: Telephone Number STATUS: Status of the IP Station PCN: PS Community Number ERN: Calling Area Number GRN:...
Page 926: Mbpm Make-Busy Of Port Microprocessor
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands MBPM: Make-Busy of Port Microprocessor 1. Functional Outline This command is used to set and reset the make-busy state of the circuit card that contains the port microprocessor. This setting and resetting is performed individually for each circuit card. If the location of the circuit card containing the port microprocessor is specified in this command, the operating state of all circuit cards in the associated unit is displayed.
Page 927: Mbrt Make-Busy Of Route
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands MBRT: Make-Busy of Route 1. Functional Outline This command is used to assign IDLE/BUSY status for all the trunks in the route designated. 2. Parameters Input data Route Number of the external route/internal route. Table 7-1 provides the meaning of the internal route number.
Page 928: Mbrt_Lr Make-Busy Of Route - Logical Route Number
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands MBRT_LR:Make-Busy of Route - Logical Route Number 1. Functional Outline This command is used to assign Idle/Busy status of all the trunks in the logical route designated. Route number of the MBRT command can be assigned by using logical route. When logging in to the NCN (Network Control Node), the data of other LN (Local Node) can be changed.
Page 929: Mbsm Make-Busy Of System Message Printout
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands MBSM: Make-Busy of System Message Printout 1. Functional Outline This command is used to allow and inhibit the system message printer to output system messages. 2. Parameters Input data Port No.: Port Number of the printer Make-Busy Information [0-1] 0=Make Idle 1=Make Busy...
Page 930: Mbst Make-Busy Of Station
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands MBST: Make-Busy of Station 1. Functional Outline This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of stations. 2. Parameters Input data TN: Tenant Number STN: Physical Station Number (a maximum of five digits for Business system, and six digits for Hotel sys- tem.) MB: Make-Busy Information [0-1] 0=Make Idle...
Page 931: Mbst_T Make-Busy Of Station – Telephone Number
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands MBST_T: Make-Busy of Station – Telephone Number 1. Functional Outline This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of stations, by using Telephone Numbers. This command is only available at NCN (for FCCS network). 2. Parameters Input Data UGN: User Group Number...
Page 932: Mbtc Make-Busy Of Trunk-Continuous
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands MBTC: Make-Busy of Trunk-Continuous 1. Functional Outline This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of trunks. By using this command, multiple trunks can be placed into IDLE/BUSY state simultaneously per a route designated in RT parameter. 2.
Page 933: Mbtc_Lr Make-Busy Of Trunk-Continuous – Logical Route Number
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands MBTC_LR: Make-Busy of Trunk-Continuous – Logical Route Number 1. Functional Outline This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of trunks. By using this command, multiple trunks can be placed into IDLE/BUSY state simultaneously per a logical route designated in LGRT parameter. Route number of the MBTC command can be assigned by using logical route.
Page 934: Mbtk Make-Busy Of Trunk
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands MBTK: Make-Busy of Trunk 1. Functional Outline This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of trunks. 2. Parameters Route Number Trunk Number Make-Busy Information [0-2] 0=Make Idle 1=Make Busy (Outgoing) 2=Make Busy (Bothway) Note For Business system, the data is valid for the ACIS/CCIS line (TCL=4, 5, 7).
Page 935: Mbtk_Lr Make - Busy Of Trunk – Logical Route Number
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands MBTK_LR: Make - Busy of Trunk – Logical Route Number 1. Functional Outline This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of trunks. Route number of the MBTK command can be assigned by using logical route number. When logging in to the Network Control Node (NCN), the data of other Local Node (LN) can be changed.
Page 936: Mem_Hdd Data Control Between Memory And Hdd
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands MEM_HDD: Data Control Between Memory and HDD 1. Functional Outline This command is used to load the Office Data from the SV8500 Flash Card to the SV8500 Memory, back up the Office Data from the SV8500 Memory to the SV8500 Flash Card, and verify the Office Data between the SV8500 Memory and the SV8500 flash Card.
Page 937 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Auto Scroll: Check this box to refresh the Processing Status Log. < For Redundant Data Memory Backup on Individual Hard Drive > Note 3 Click Option in the menu bar, and select Drive Select. A window, with the following parameter, appears. In the window, designate the affected Drive: Office Data: Drive B (default setting)
Page 938: Mem_Hdd_N Data Control Between Memory And Hdd For Fusion Network
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands MEM_HDD_N: Data Control Between Memory and HDD for Fusion Network 1. Functional Outline This command, available at the NCN only, is used to save/verify a series of Office Data from the Memory of all Local Nodes to the Flash Card of each same node. You can install/verify the data onto the Flash Card of all the node on the FCCS network (Maximum 64 Note: nodes).
Page 939 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Click “Option” in the menu bar, and select “Drive Select”. Then, a window, with the following parameter, appears. On the window, designate the affected Drive: Office Data: Drive B (default setting) Drive C Drive B/C When Data Memory is selected, Network Data Memory (NDM) and Local Data Memory (LDM) are Note 1: also saved/verified simultaneously.
Page 940: Mfch Make Busy Of Fcch
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands MFCH: Make Busy of FCCH 1. Functional Outline This command is used to set or reset the make-busy state of FCH card. 2. Parameters Input Data FCHN: FCH Number [1-255] Make-Busy Information [0-1] 0=Make Idle 1=Make Busy –...
Page 941: Pmbu Port Microprocessor Back Up
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands PMBU: Port Microprocessor Back Up 1. Functional Outline This command is used to save the contents of the Port Microprocessor (PM) onto a Floppy Disk (FD) or verify them. Information of firmware (Program Code) also appears on the screen. 2.
Page 942: Ralm Release Alarm
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands RALM: Release Alarm 1. Functional Outline This command is used to clear the fault indications. 2. Parameters Input data WRT: Y=Alarm is released N=Not released RETURN TO MENU?: Y=Return to MENU N=Start operation again Output data Alarms Released –...
Page 943: Ralmn Release Alarm For Ndm
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands RALMN: Release Alarm for NDM 1. Functional Outline This command, available at the NCN only, is used to clear the fault indications of all the Nodes by clicking the release button on the display. 2. Parameters Output data FPC: FPC of alarm released nodes STATUS: Result of releasing the alarm (OK/NG)
Page 944: Rdpd Removal Of Dterm Ip Password
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands RDPD: Removal of Dterm IP Password 1. Functional Outline This command is used to delete the password of IP Enabled Dterm. The IP Enabled Dterm assigns the password for logging in to the SV8500 for security use. This is a command to delete the IP Enabled Dterm’s password from PCPro side.
Page 945: Rinz Route Initialize
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands RINZ: Route Initialize 1. Functional Outline This command is used to initialize virtual trunk data used for Protocol Handler (PH) cards. When in-progress virtual trunk is not able to recover from a fault, this command is used to disconnect the in-progress call forcefully due to the recovery.
Page 946: Rlmg Release Of Media Gateway
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands RLMG: Release of Media Gateway 1. Functional Outline This command is used to check which channel of MG(PRI) is retaining an ongoing call (Initial setting is incomplete). Also, the channel retaining an ongoing call can be reset (Forceful Switchover). 2.
Page 947: Rlst Release Station/Trunk
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands RLST: Release Station/Trunk 1. Functional Outline This command is used to release a station, trunk, or virtual trunk when using PHG circuit card. When in-progress virtual trunk is not able to recover from a fault, this command is used to disconnect the in- progress call forcefully due to the recovery.
Page 948 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands 2=Busy 3=Lockout 4=Make Busy 5=Call Now (PHS system only) Information: Information of the connected party Note This parameter appears only when STATUS=2. Note: CNT: Count FPC: Fusion Point Code (1-253) LENS: Line Equipment Number TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number RT: External/Internal Route Number TK: Trunk Number (1-255)
Page 949: Rlst_T Release Of Station/Trunk – Telephone Number
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands RLST_T: Release of Station/Trunk – Telephone Number 1. Functional Outline This command is used to release a station/trunk, by using Telephone Numbers. This command is only available at NCN (for FCCS network). 2. Parameters Input Data TYPE: Telephone Number Trunk...
Page 950 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands STATUS: Status of Station/Trunk (1-5) 1=Idle 2=Busy 3=Lockout 4=Make Busy 5=Now Calling Information: Information on the connected party Note 5 ERN: Area Number (1-32) Note 6 GRN: Group Number (1-8) Note 6 CSN/ZTN: CS/ZT Number (1-32) Note 6 PCN: PHS Community Number (1-1024) Note 6...
Page 951: Rpid Remove Of Pad Lock Id Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands RPID : Remove of Pad Lock ID Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to release the PAD LOCK ID Code setting of each analog/Dterm station by the PCPro operation. 2. Parameters Input Data Tenant Number Enter the Tenant Number in which the target station belongs.
Page 952: Scvt Setting / Change Of Virtual Trunk Operation Data
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands SCVT: Setting / Change of Virtual Trunk Operation Data 1. Functional Outline This command is used to initialize memory due to changing virtual trunk data of the Protocol Handler (PH) cards. Memory initialization starts when trunk status is Idle and Bothway Make-Busy. Virtual trunks indicated here become available only when virtual channels via PHC are used with CCIS Note: over IP.
Page 953: Sinz System Initialize
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands SINZ: System Initialize 1. Functional Outline This command is used to initialize the system from PCPro. WARNING: Do not use this command when the system is in normal operation since this command ex- ecutes the system initialization. When the system is initialized, PCPro is disconnected.
Page 954 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands The system initialize is executed for STBY side by loading the program and the office data from the CF card to MEM. <Standby> Restart Note 1 The system initialize is executed for STBY side by restarting the system. <Standby>...
Page 955: Sinzn System Initialize For The Fccs Network
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands SINZN: System Initialize for the FCCS Network 1. Functional Outline This command is used to simultaneously initialize the SV8500 systems on the same FCCS (Fusion) network. At the time of each system initialization, specify whether to load the Program/Office Data, depending on the data setting below.
Page 956: Spts Scanning Of Port Status
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands SPTS: Scanning of Port Status 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display momentarily the working status of Port Microprocessor (PM) on Module Group (MG), Unit, and Group basis. 2. Parameters Input data MG: Module Group Number Unit: Unit Number Group: Group Information Interval: Unit for this parameter is in seconds.
Page 957 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Figure 7-7 Port Status Report (MG) Display Scanning of Port Status (SPTS) Type SCAN Interval 1: by MG 3: by MG, Unit, Group STOP EXIT 2: by MG, Unit Dynamic Port Status Report (MG) Package Status PM: Package is not Mounted or Package is make Busy. More than one port in a Group is Idle.
Page 958 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Type 2: By MG, Unit Display of Scanning by Designating Unit (Figure 7-8) Port Status on Circuit Card Basis ID: On-line Status BY: Make Busy/Not Mounted Port Status on Circuit Level Basis 0: Not Assigned 1: Line Idle 2: Line Busy 3: Make Busy 4: Lockout...
Page 959 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands Type 3: By MG, Unit, Group Display of Scanning by Designating Group When Group is Designated (Figure 7-9) STATUS: Idle = Idle -- = Unassigned Port TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number TEC: Telephone Equipment Class Figure 7-9 Port Status Report (MG, Unit, Group) Display—Designating Group Scanning of Port Status (SPTS) Type...
Page 960 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands When Group-Trunk is Designated (Figure 7-10) RT: See Table 7-2. TK: Trunk Number TCL: Trunk Class Figure 7-10 Port Status Report (MG, Unit, Group) Display—Designating Group-Trunk Scanning of Port Status (SPTS) Type SCAN Unit Group Interval 1: by MG 3: by MG, Unit, Group STOP...
Page 961: Srts Scanning Of Route Status
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands SRTS: Scanning of Route Status 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the designated trunk status (IDLE/BUSY) at predetermined intervals. A maximum of 15 routes can be scanned. 2. Parameters Input data Route Number Interval Time Output data Number of Idle TK...
Page 962: Srts_Lr Scanning Of Route Status - Logical Route Number
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands SRTS_LR: Scanning of Route Status - Logical Route Number 1. Functional Outline This command is used to display the designated trunk status (IDLE/BUSY) at predetermined intervals. A maximum of 15 routes can be scanned. Route number of the SRTS command can be assigned by using a logical route number.
Page 963: Togc Test Of Originating Connection
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands TOGC: Test of Originating Connection 1. Functional Outline This command is used to execute originating connection tests by specifying the self-trunk/station number and the destination route/trunk number on the PCPro display. By using this command, the following is available: •...
Page 964 CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands RT=Physical Route of Called Party LGRT=Logical Route of Called Party CALLING TN: Tenant Number of Calling Party CALLING STN: Station Number of Calling Party CALLING UGN: User Group Number of Calling Party This parameter appears when CALLING STN TYPE = TELN (NDM)/TELN (LDM). Note 1: CALLING TELN: Telephone Number of Calling Party This parameter appears when CALLING STN TYPE = TELN (NDM)/TELN (LDM).
Page 965 CALLING TK: Trunk Number of Calling Party This parameter appears when CALLING RT TYPE = RT (Physical Route)/LGRT (Logical Route). Note 7: CALLED RT: Route Number of Called Party This parameter appears when CALLED RT TYPE = RT (Physical Route). Note 8: CALLED LGRT: Logical Route Number of Called Party This parameter appears when CALLED RT TYPE = LGRT (Logical Route).
Page 966: Appendix A Minor Version Update For Online Software
APPENDIX A APPENDIX A Minor Version Update for Online Software CAUTION Follow this procedure only when instructed to do so by the service technician. 1. GENERAL This feature is used to apply patches to the Telephony Server’s program. Telephony Server Maintenance Console 1.
Page 967 APPENDIX A STEP 2 Start up maintenance console’s PCPro Tools. Select “Tool” — “Install Data Registration Setting” from the menu bar. This opens “Install Data Registration Setting” window. STEP 3 In “Install Data Registration Setting” window: 1. From “Install Data List,” select data you wish to install. Note 1 2.
Page 968 APPENDIX A STEP 8 In PCPro Tools’ Patch menu: 1. Select the following: • Operation: Write • Install Data Name: Data selected in STEP 3–1 • Patch Selection: Data Name set in “Install Data Name” box of STEP 5–2 2. Press “Execute” button. (2) Use XPAT command to apply uploaded patch files to the Telephony Server.
Page 969: Deleting Patch Files
APPENDIX A 4. Deleting Patch Files Delete patch files that cannot be applied by XPAT command using the following steps. STEP 1 Delete all patch files using PCPro Tools. STEP 2 Excluding files that are not applicable, use PCPro Tools to upload patch files to the Telephony Server.
Page 970: Xpat On–Line Patch Install
APPENDIX A XPAT: On–line Patch Install 1. Functional Outline This command applies the patches, uploaded to the Telephony Server using PCPro Tools, at once rather than one at a time. 2. Parameters Input Data Mode: Select target CPU to perform patch application by radio button. •...
Page 971 APPENDIX A Buttons Get: Read out a list of patch files uploaded to the Telephony Server. Check: Check format of the patch file. Apply: Apply the patch file. Exit: Exit this command. – 924 –...
Page 972 REVISION SHEET UNIVERGE SV8500 Operations and Maintenance Manual NWA-041693-001 Revision Sheet :DATE JANUARY,2009 Chapter 1 1, 4, 7, 8 Chapter 2 49, 51, 54, 54, 63, 63, 63, 66, 68, 69, 72, 74, 76, 113, 168 Chapter 3 200, 201, 244, 245, 345, 346,...
Page 974 Printed in Japan 0901-020...

This manual is also suitable for:

Fp85-104 s1e

NEC Univerge SV8500 Operation And Maintenance Manual

Operations and Maintenance Manual

(Continued)

Chapter 1 General

Chapter 2 Operations of Sv8500 Server

Chapter 3 System Messages

Chapter 4 Fault Repair Procedures

Chapter 5 Operation Procedure for System with Pir

Chapter 6 Routine Maintenance Procedure

Chapter 7 Maintenance Commands

Appendix A Minor Version Update for Online Software

Quick Links

Chapters

Related Manuals for NEC Univerge SV8500

Summary of Contents for NEC Univerge SV8500